{"title":"Bookshelf Speakers","description":"","products":[{"product_id":"monitor-audio-bronze-50-7g-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Bronze 50 7G Bookshelf Speakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Gold Dome, and a Front Baffle of Real Wood\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Bronze 50 7G is a two-way standmount, and a 6-inch C-CAM bass-mid driver does the heavy work. A 25 mm C-CAM Gold Dome tweeter takes over at 3.0 kHz, behind an aluminum grille patterned in small hexagons.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe front baffle is real wood veneered plywood. It is set slightly apart from the cabinet body, so you can see it is a separate piece. Each cabinet is 13.3 inches tall, 7.3 wide and 12.9 deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eC-CAM, and Why the Cone Is Metal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eC-CAM stands for Ceramic-Coated Aluminum Magnesium. Monitor Audio prefers metal cones because they are light but stiff. The cone moves more like a piston, and bends less as it travels. Less bending means less distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes an in-room response of 41 Hz to 30 kHz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 86 dB. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms. The minimum is 4.0 ohms, at 200 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe recommendation is 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms. If your amplifier is rated into 4 ohms, that becomes 50 to 200 watts. Continuous power handling is 100 watts, and peak output is quoted at 112 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Ports Come With Foam Inserts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is ported at the back. Monitor Audio supplies foam inserts to rein the bass in. They help, but they are no substitute for space. These speakers reward being pulled out into the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eKashfia Kabir gave the Bronze 50 7G five stars for sound, build and compatibility in \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e on September 25, 2025: \"Monitor Audio has done a terrific job with the new Bronze 50 7G standmounts.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the sound: \"For a speaker at this price level, the Bronze 7G are unusually precise and controlled.\" Her one caveat: they \"can sound a little uptight on occasion, but not so much that it becomes an issue\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby, reviewing for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e on December 17, 2025, heard \"a clean, clear and very exciting sound presentation that can easily detach you from your listening room and send you on a musical journey\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a speaker that grabs you\u003c\/strong\u003e — the character here is clear, fast and front-footed rather than polite, which is exactly what makes them hold your attention on the first track\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBass matters to you\u003c\/strong\u003e — Rigby’s verdict on the low end: \"And bass? For the price and size of the cabinets? Beautiful.\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou might bi-wire one day\u003c\/strong\u003e — each rear panel carries bi-wire terminals, so a single run works now and you can split the links later without changing speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is ordinary, not enormous\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB sensitivity and a 30 to 100 watt window into 8 ohms make these an easy match, and one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e in that range will do nicely\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou can give them room to breathe\u003c\/strong\u003e — foam port inserts are supplied, but these sound best pulled away from the back wall, so a shelf pushed against plasterboard is the one placement to avoid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach rear panel carries bi-wire terminals. Leave the links in place and run a single cable from your amplifier for a conventional hookup, or take the links out and run separate cable to the treble and bass sections instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStart with the cabinets about 12 inches from the back wall, on stands, and leave the ports clear. Then move them by small amounts until the stereo image locks in. Keep both cable runs the same length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Bronze 50 7G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Monitor Audio’s own ST-2 is the matching stand, and we stock it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms is the window\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — two runs per side if you decide to bi-wire\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for anything below the 41 Hz mark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Both rear panels carry bi-wire terminals. Remove the links and run separate cable to each pair, or feed them from separate amplifier channels if you would rather bi-amplify.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio recommends 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms, or 50 to 200 watts into 4 ohms. At 86 dB sensitivity they are not fussy, and reviewers have found them easy to partner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo stands come with them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStands are separate. Monitor Audio makes the ST-2 specifically for standmounts of this size, and a stand suits these better than a shelf does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow far from the wall should they sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBegin around 12 inches out and adjust from there. The ports fire backwards, so crowding the wall thickens the bass. Use the supplied foam inserts only if you cannot find the space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow big and heavy are they?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures roughly 13.3 by 7.3 by 12.9 inches, and weighs 14 pounds 2 ounces. They ship as a pair, and Monitor Audio covers them for five years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the next range up add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/monitor-audio-silver-50-8g-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMonitor Audio Silver 50 8G\u003c\/a\u003e moves to the RST III cone, reaches 35 kHz, and puts four more pounds into each cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e spends ten minutes with a pair:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/_bwoLSCOmYY\" title=\"MONITOR AUDIO BRONZE 50 7G Review - Small Box, Big Sound\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJanine Elliot reviews them for \u003cem\u003eSound Advice\u003c\/em\u003e:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/mgEj5-u5JUM\" title=\"Monitor Audio Bronze 50 7G Stand-mount Stereo Speakers review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, bi-wiring, or matching an amplifier to your speakers? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980500394157,"sku":"NEW-MRB7G50B-PR","price":649.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Demo","offer_id":45980500426925,"sku":"DEMO-MRB7G50B-PR","price":698.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRB7G50-BLK-PR_01_angle_pair_2025__75676.1755871885.1280.1280_b02705d4-1723-4953-a129-7904c8992814.jpg?v=1778163642"},{"product_id":"cambridge-audio-minx-min-12-satellite-speaker-black-each","title":"Cambridge Audio Minx Min 12 Satellite Speaker - Black - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThree Inches Square, One Driver, Wide Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Minx Min 12 is Cambridge Audio's smallest satellite, a 3.1-inch cube built around a single 2.25-inch Balanced Mode Radiator. The BMR moves like a cone at low frequencies and flexes like a flat panel higher up, so one driver covers the range with unusually wide dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is sold one speaker at a time in a high-gloss lacquer finish, so a stereo pair, a center channel or a five-speaker surround set costs exactly what it should. Cambridge designed the Min 12 to run with a subwoofer, and its compact Minx X201 is the natural partner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Fits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBuy two for a desk or a small den, one to sit under a TV, or several for surrounds. The same speaker in every position keeps the tonal character consistent all the way around the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCambridge quotes 150 Hz to 20 kHz, 86 dB sensitivity at 2.83 volts and an 8 ohm impedance, with 25 to 200 watts recommended. An entry-level integrated amplifier or any AV receiver is enough, and the 150 Hz floor is why a subwoofer belongs in the plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Little Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe cabinet measures 3.1 inches wide, 3.1 tall and 3.3 deep, and weighs under a pound. A standard 3\/8-inch threaded insert on the back takes Cambridge's Minx wall mounts and stands, so it can go almost anywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have almost no space\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 3-inch cube under a pound fits a desk, a shelf, a windowsill or a wall bracket where nothing else will\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building surround sound in stages\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold individually, so you can add one \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/rear-and-surround-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003esurround speaker\u003c\/a\u003e at a time and end with a set voiced to match itself\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a discreet TV or desktop system\u003c\/strong\u003e — two Min 12s and a small subwoofer make a 2.1 setup that hides in plain sight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is an ordinary one\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB and 8 ohms with a 25 to 200 watt window suits any of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e or receivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan on a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — 150 Hz is the floor, so a \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003esubwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e is not optional for music or film; this is a satellite, not a full-range bookshelf speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Does It Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Min 12 is passive. Speaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the binding posts on the back, and the posts pull out to accept 4 mm banana plugs if you prefer them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSit it on a shelf or thread it onto a Minx mount, and aim each speaker roughly at the seating area. With a subwoofer, set the crossover near 150 Hz, which is where the Min 12 rolls off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Min 12 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/cambridge-audio-minx-x201-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCambridge Audio Minx X201 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Minx sub built to carry everything below 150 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/cambridge-audio-minx-400m-wall-mounts-gloss-white-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCambridge Audio Minx 400M wall mounts\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Cambridge's own pivoting brackets, sold as a pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 25 to 200 watts into 8 ohms is the window, and Cambridge's AXA35 sits inside it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — more runs than usual in a surround set, so buy accordingly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs this one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. Order two for stereo, or as many as your surround layout calls for. We list it this way because Cambridge sells it one to a box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use it as a center channel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. A cube has no wrong way up, so the same Min 12 works as a front, a center or a surround, and every position shares one voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The Min 12 reaches 150 Hz, which leaves all of the bass to a subwoofer. Cambridge designed the Minx range around that split, and the X201 is its matching sub.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier power does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCambridge recommends 25 to 200 watts into 8 ohms. Sensitivity is 86 dB, so a 35 watt integrated amplifier or a mid-size receiver will drive a set comfortably at normal levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I wall mount it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The back carries a standard 3\/8-inch threaded insert, and Cambridge's Minx 400M pivoting wall mounts are made for it. Table stands and floor stands are also available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the Min 12 different from the MSX20?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/cambridge-audio-minx-msx20-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMSX20\u003c\/a\u003e is Cambridge's newer, taller satellite. It adds a second driver for bass and reaches 120 Hz instead of 150 Hz, at a modest step up in cost per speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTheMazCorner gives a ten-minute owner review of the Min 12:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/gS6KiTbeZGA\" title=\"Review of Cambridge Audio of Minx Min 12\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA ninety-second retailer tour of the Minx Min satellites:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/TMAh_xSfrYA\" title=\"Cambridge Audio Minx Min satellite speakers\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about satellite speakers, subwoofer crossover settings, or building a home theater in stages? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Cambridge Audio","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45980506357933,"sku":"NEW-CAMIMIN12-EABLK-SIN","price":99.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/camimin12_wht-large__61281.1730959011.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778133529"},{"product_id":"mission-750-bookshelf-speakers-walnut-pair","title":"Mission 750 Bookshelf Speakers - Walnut - Pair","description":"\u003ch3\u003eBorrows Technology from High-End Mission Floorstanders\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe all-new Mission 750 bookshelf speaker brings the award-winning 'modern-classic' design to a whole-new price-point and category.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Mission 750 follows in the footsteps of the award-laden flagship Mission 770 – which also heralded Mission's return to UK-based manufacturing – and even more recently, the Mission 700.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eDeveloped as a result of overwhelming demand for the 700 series' standout industrial design, heavily influenced by Mission's original and seminal 700 series, the Mission 750 brings technology and performance traits from critically acclaimed 770 and 700 models but in a more compact, bookshelf speaker design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eAn Entirely New Concept and Model\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eUnlike the 770 and 700, which are both more than just reintroductions in being bang-up-to-date innovations based upon predecessor models, the new Mission 750 is an entirely new concept and model. It is designed specifically to accommodate the market segments and budgets below that of the larger models in the series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eAlthough it is equally as complex as any loudspeaker, in terms of its development the all-new Mission 750 benefits from utilizing many of the same innovations of award-winning predecessors. This makes for a loudspeaker model that is technically advanced yet classically styled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBig Bass Extension from a Compact Cabinet\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eStarting with the cabinet, the Mission 750's housing is a mere 14\" high, 8.5\" wide, and 10.6\" deep, which is perfect for a bookshelf speaker application. However, it still employs a design and build standard equal to that of the Mission 700. These shared features include the multi-layer sandwich construction and specially developed acoustic damping adhesive complemented by a custom internal bracing structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eA lining of foam and 'long-hair' fiber contributes to internal resonance control, while the custom-profiled rear reflex ports helps with bass extension beyond what is traditionally expected from a cabinet of these compact dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe now-famous-again white front baffle and Mission logo are instantly recognizable. As is the rich black or walnut real-wood veneer, but in a format more accommodating for smaller spaces and easier placement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eProprietary Inverted Geometry Design\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Inverted Geometry Design (IGD) of the Mission 750's cabinet and driver array isn't just a design statement. It is a crucial component of Mission's loudspeaker design from the original 700 series onwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eBy placing the treble unit below the bass\/midrange driver, the length of the sound path is balanced, resulting in sound waves that coincide at the listener's head height. This technique improves time alignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eHowever, this design isn't simply a matter of inverting the speaker cabinet. Every aspect of the industrial and mechanical design requires precise calculations to ensure that the positioning, spacing, and alignment contribute to the goal of achieving optimal time alignment. This is achieved through a meticulous crossover design process that is of artisan quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eNewly Developed Polypropylene Bass\/Midrange Driver\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eIn IDG format, the all-new Mission 750, just like the 700 and 770, uses a newly developed polypropylene bass\/midrange driver and motor system, but in a new 5.25” profile specifically designed for this model. This innovative cone and driver technology not only enhances the loudspeaker's overall design to meet modern power handling and dynamic requirements, but it also maintains the 700 series extended response and low coloration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eEvery aspect, from the rigid, cast chassis to the low-density surround, has been thoroughly examined to deliver a driver with greater rigidity and precision-controlled cone-termination for dynamic performances and tight, fast, and energetic output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eLightweight, Coated Microfiber Dome Tweeter\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eHigh-frequency reproduction is provided by the 1\" lightweight, coated microfiber dome, as found in the Mission 700 model, and similarly placed below that bass\/midrange driver.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eWith a high-frequency performance eerily close to that of the flagship 770, the Mission 750 also incorporates a specially damped rear chamber which aids in resonance control. It also extends bandwidth and facilitates the crossover frequency for super smooth treble performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eAn Uncompromising Standard of Quality\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eAs with all Mission loudspeakers, an uncompromising standard of quality is employed from concept to delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eMission's extremely high standard consists of hundreds of hours of listening plus custom-designed computer-aided Optimization technology that allows for fine-tuning the crossover, perfecting the combination of the driver selection for the ultimate loudspeaker system cohesion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe result is a 'sum of all its parts' design that brings a musical character with thrilling detail and musicality not just matching the acclaimed level of performance set by the original Mission 700 series, but exceeding it in the same vein as the new Mission 700 and 770.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eZ Reviews examines the Mission 750:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/sItkZBB3Oqs\" title=\"The Mission 750 are just the TIP..\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee an overview of the Mission 750 bookshelf speakers:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/o9KU_b8Ih00\" title=\"2024 New Release - Mission 750 Bookshelf Speakers Overview\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n","brand":"Mission","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45980515893421,"sku":"NEW-MNM750-WAL-PR","price":1299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MNM750_WAL_01_2024__51407.1731172524.1280.1280_0d09e05a-6b9d-42d2-b448-42adc684b522.jpg?v=1778153885"},{"product_id":"bowers-wilkins-607-s3-bookshelf-speakers-oak-pair","title":"Bowers \u0026 Wilkins 607 S3 Bookshelf Speakers - Oak - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W’s Smallest Standmount, Built From the Same Parts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 607 S3 is a two-way vented-box design. A 5-inch Continuum cone covers bass and midrange, with a 1-inch Decoupled Double Dome Titanium tweeter above it. Both come from the same engineering as B\u0026amp;W’s larger ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.8 inches tall, 6.5 wide and 9.3 deep with the grille and terminals fitted, and each weighs 10.3 pounds. This is the compact end of the range, and it fits places a bigger standmount cannot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eContinuum, and Why the Cone Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eContinuum is the composite cone B\u0026amp;W spent eight years in development for the 800 Series Diamond. It is built to behave consistently as it moves rather than changing character partway, which is what your ear notices most on voices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W quotes a frequency range of 40 Hz to 33 kHz at minus 6 dB, and a response of 52 Hz to 28 kHz within 3 dB. Sensitivity is 84 dB. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms with a minimum of 3.0 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHarmonic distortion stays under 1 percent from 100 Hz to 22 kHz, and under 0.5 percent between 500 Hz and 10 kHz. B\u0026amp;W recommends 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms on unclipped programme, and speaker cable under 0.1 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Foam Inserts Change the Bass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear Flowport vents each cabinet, and B\u0026amp;W supplies two ways to tame it. Foam plugs cut the bass most, while foam rings do the same thing more gently, and both matter when a speaker ends up closer to a wall than you would like.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e made the 607 S3 an Awards 2024 winner: \"There’s clarity and refinement in the mix here – to a really admirable level – but we’re struck by just how entertaining, zippy and musical this new pair sounds.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSimon Lucas reviewed them for \u003cem\u003eTechRadar\u003c\/em\u003e on August 18, 2024. On the balance B\u0026amp;W struck: \"There’s plenty of refinement here, but there’s even more brio.\" His summary was that \"These speakers prove that small can sound beautiful\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth flag the same caveat. \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e notes the 607 S3’s \"enthusiastic character leads to a rather forward presentation, and any similarly top-heavy kit can exacerbate that quality\", advising \"a more balanced amplifier\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is small and your shelf is smaller\u003c\/strong\u003e — under 12 inches tall and just over 10 pounds each, so they go where a larger standmount will not, and they still use the same drivers B\u0026amp;W puts in bigger cabinets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen close\u003c\/strong\u003e — a compact two-way with the tweeter right above the mid keeps the drivers close together, which is what makes a nearfield seat sound coherent rather than split in two\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThey will sit near a wall\u003c\/strong\u003e — B\u0026amp;W supplies both foam plugs and gentler foam rings for the port, so you can dial the bass back by degrees instead of moving furniture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a starting point, not a compromise\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Continuum cone and Titanium Dome tweeter are the same ideas as further up the range, so the character is consistent if you build outward later\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCheck your amplifier first\u003c\/strong\u003e — 84 dB sensitivity is on the low side and the load dips to 3.0 ohms, so B\u0026amp;W asks for 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms; a small streaming amp will run out of room, and one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e in that window will not\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the single pair of binding posts on each cabinet, and both runs should be the same length. B\u0026amp;W asks that the cable stay under 0.1 ohms, which is a question of gauge and distance rather than brand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W designed these primarily for its FS-600 S3 floor stand, and says a shelf works but gives less room to optimize. On a shelf, fit the four self-adhesive rubber feet supplied, and keep the cabinets at least half a meter from the back and side walls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most 607 S3 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — what B\u0026amp;W designed these for, and not included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms is the window\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — under 0.1 ohms total, so gauge and length matter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for the bottom octave a 5-inch driver cannot reach\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier do these need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W recommends 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms on unclipped programme. Sensitivity is 84 dB and the impedance dips to 3.0 ohms, so give them a little more power than the size suggests.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo they come with stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStands are separate. B\u0026amp;W built these around its FS-600 S3 stand, though a shelf is perfectly workable if you use the supplied rubber feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat are the foam plugs for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThey fit the rear port and reduce bass when a speaker sits close to a wall. Foam rings are also supplied and do the same thing more gently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow far from the wall should they sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W asks for at least half a meter from the back and side walls. Closer than that, reach for the foam inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat if I want more scale than this?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStep up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/bowers-wilkins-606-s3-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eBowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 606 S3\u003c\/a\u003e. It uses a 6.5-inch Continuum cone, reads 88 dB sensitivity, and takes up to 120 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow big and heavy are they?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.8 inches tall, 6.5 wide and 9.3 deep with grille and terminals, and weighs 10.3 pounds. They ship as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own walkthrough of the 607 S3:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/yxhqeD2fk5g\" title=\"Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 607 S3: Award-Winning Compact Speakers Redefine Sound!\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTaps Das reviews them for \u003cem\u003eSecrets of Home Theater and High Fidelity\u003c\/em\u003e:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/7kiorjixe2s\" title=\"Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 607 S3 Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, matching an amplifier to your speakers, or bookshelf speakers generally? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Bowers and Wilkins","offers":[{"title":"Oak \/ New","offer_id":45980518121645,"sku":"NEW-BW607S3-OAK","price":1000.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/BW607S3_OAK_01_2023__04557.1730953364.1280.1280_18317f50-baf4-4e34-a103-92df224cb44c.jpg?v=1778147128"},{"product_id":"focal-aria-evo-x-no-1-bookshelf-speaker-gloss-black-pair","title":"Focal Aria Evo X No. 1 Bookshelf Speaker - Gloss Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Flax Cone Aria, Made Compact\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Aria Evo X No. 1 is the standmount in Focal's refreshed Aria line. It pairs Focal's 1-inch aluminum-magnesium TAM inverted dome tweeter with a 6.5-inch Flax mid\/bass driver, in a cabinet a little over 15 inches tall with non-parallel side walls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Flax cone is Focal's signature: a layer of French flax fiber sandwiched between two thin sheets of glass fiber, built in Focal's own workshops. It is light for speed, stiff for bass and well damped for a neutral midrange, which is the character the Aria line is known for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat the TAM Tweeter and TMD Surround Add\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe TAM tweeter uses an M-shaped inverted dome for wider dispersion and finer detail. The mid\/bass driver's surround carries Focal's Tuned Mass Damper, small weights that stabilize the surround to keep the midrange clean at volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFocal quotes 55 Hz to 30 kHz within 3 dB, with the low end reaching 47 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 89.5 dB. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms with a 4.6 ohm minimum, and Focal recommends 25 to 120 watts. It is an easy speaker to drive well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11 inches wide, 15.4 tall and 8.9 deep, and weighs 19 pounds. Four counter-spikes come pre-fitted for a shelf or stand, and Focal offers a dedicated stand as an option. The front panel has a leather-effect finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Methfessel reviewed the Aria Evo X No. 1 for \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e on November 19, 2024: the speakers \"allow for relaxed listening and render music in a way that encourages sharing with others.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn integration: \"The bass response seamlessly integrates with the ever-present midrange.\" His caveat: \"if edgy, crisp, and definitive resolution evoke excitement, these may not be the right choice for you.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis summary: \"With a sound that's as smooth as butter and a gentle softening of sharp edges, these bookies leave for some relaxed listening.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen for voices\u003c\/strong\u003e — Methfessel kept returning to the vocal presence, and the Flax midrange is the reason people buy an Aria\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a smooth, long-session sound\u003c\/strong\u003e — the TAM tweeter is tuned for ease rather than bite, so bright recordings stay listenable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is small to medium\u003c\/strong\u003e — an office or a modest living room is what Focal designed it for, on a stand or a solid shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is modest but decent\u003c\/strong\u003e — 89.5 dB and 25 to 120 watts is a wide, forgiving window for any \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want crisp, etched detail and sharp transients\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is not that speaker; Methfessel says so plainly, and a brighter design will suit you better\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to a single pair of binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands or a sturdy shelf with the pre-fitted counter-spikes, a foot or more from the wall behind them, and toe them in slightly. Focal drivers loosen up over the first weeks, so judge the bass after some hours of playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Aria Evo X No. 1 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 25 to 120 watts into 8 ohms; a refined one matches the speaker's character\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — about 24 inches puts the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/focal-aria-evo-x-center-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFocal Aria Evo X Center\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center channel for a home theater front stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/music-streamers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMusic streamers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean source for a speaker this even-handed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Aria Evo X No. 1 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, with four counter-spikes already mounted on each cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFocal recommends 25 to 120 watts. Sensitivity is 89.5 dB, so even a modest amplifier plays them well. The 4.6 ohm minimum is nothing a decent integrated amplifier will notice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan they go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFocal says yes, on a stand or directly on furniture. They are 15.4 inches tall and 11 wide, so they need a generous shelf, and a foot of space behind them keeps the bass in balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The Aria Evo X No. 1 reaches 47 Hz at minus 6 dB, and the review found the bass well integrated. For film, a subwoofer adds the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack High Gloss, Prime Walnut and Moss Green High Gloss, each with a leather-effect front panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat changed from the earlier Aria 900 series?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Evo X generation keeps the Flax cone and adds the TAM tweeter, the TMD surround and a redesigned cabinet with non-parallel walls, in a more compact standmount than before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Absolute Sound reviews the Aria Evo X No. 1 on video:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/4LlFyYvB12U\" title=\"Best Bookshelf Speakers Series: Focal Aria Evo X No. 1 Review - The Absolute Sound\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMad Audio's review:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/06u-MIu1qy8\" title=\"Focal Aria Evo X No.1 Review - Mad Audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Focal","offers":[{"title":"New \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45980518613165,"sku":"NEW-FLAEXN1-BLK","price":2598.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/FLAEXN1_01_BLK_2024__57198.1731088776.1280.1280_20e2891f-c2b5-4b61-94a0-b5f8964d8840.jpg?v=1778149810"},{"product_id":"mission-m750-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair","title":"Mission M750 Bookshelf Speakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Compact Mission, With the Inverted Layout\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Mission 750 is the smallest speaker in the modern 700 series. A 5.25-inch mineral-loaded polypropylene woofer sits above a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter in a 14-inch cabinet holding 12.2 liters. It is a new design rather than a reissue, and the speakers are sold as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission's inverted layout puts the tweeter below the woofer. That evens the path lengths to a seated listener, which improves time alignment and imaging. The 750 shares its tweeter, with a damped rear chamber, with the larger 700, and its cabinet uses the same sandwich construction, damping adhesive and bracing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Small Cabinet Still Sounds Full\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rear reflex port is custom-profiled to pull bass from a 12.2-liter box. The cone is loaded with minerals for stiffness, the driver sits in a rigid die-cast chassis, and the crossover hands over at 2.4 kHz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission quotes 48 Hz to 20 kHz within 3 dB and 86 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 6 ohms nominal, 8 ohm compatible, with a 4.5 ohm minimum. Recommended power is 25 to 100 watts, and peak output is rated at 103 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8.5 inches wide, 14 tall and 12 deep with terminals, and weighs 20 pounds. Finishes are walnut or black oak real-wood veneer with the white baffle. Binding posts sit on the back, and stands are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the 750 on December 16, 2024: \"At their best, these Missions produce a balanced sound of impressive authority for something that stands just over 35cm high.\" It found them a step behind class leaders for detail.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn treble: \"The 750's tweeter has bite but is well-behaved with it.\" And on volume: \"These boxes can play loudly though, and maintain an impressive degree of composure and refinement while doing so.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the Mission look in a small room\u003c\/strong\u003e — the white baffle and inverted layout in a 14-inch cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want bass weight from a compact speaker\u003c\/strong\u003e — What Hi-Fi? heard more punch and solidity than the size suggests\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou play loud\u003c\/strong\u003e — the review found the 750 composed and refined at volume, with 103 dB peak output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is modest\u003c\/strong\u003e — 25 to 100 watts and a 6 ohm load suit most integrated amplifiers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want more bass and stands in the box\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-m700-bookshelf-speakers-with-stands-walnut-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 700\u003c\/a\u003e adds a 6.5-inch driver, a 24.8-liter cabinet and matching stands\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. An integrated amplifier of 40 watts or more is a comfortable match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on solid stands at least 20 inches from the wall behind the rear port, and angle them slightly toward the seat. What Hi-Fi? found they do not work at their best against a wall or in a bookshelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Mission 750 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 24 to 26 inches puts the drivers at ear height; stands are not included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-778x-integrated-amplifier-silver\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 778X integrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Mission's own integrated amplifier, styled to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 40 to 100 watts is the sweet spot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for music below 48 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Mission 750 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers. Stands are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission recommends 25 to 100 watts. At 86 dB sensitivity and a 6 ohm load, a 40 to 60 watt integrated amplifier is a comfortable match for a small or medium room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy is the tweeter below the woofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt evens the distance from each driver to a seated listener, which improves time alignment and imaging. Mission has used the layout since the original 700 of 1980.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan they go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThey will work, but What Hi-Fi? found them at their best on rigid stands well clear of the wall. If a shelf is the only option, pull them forward so the rear port can breathe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFor music at normal levels, no. The 750 reaches 48 Hz. For film or bass-heavy music, a small subwoofer completes it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 750 different from the Mission 700 and 770?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 750 is a new compact design with a 5.25-inch driver and no stands. The 700 and 770 are larger rebuilds of classic models, with 6.5-inch and 8-inch drivers and matching stands included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eZ Reviews on the Mission 750:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/sItkZBB3Oqs\" title=\"The Mission 750 - Z Reviews\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAudio Visual Revolution's overview of the Mission 750:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/o9KU_b8Ih00\" title=\"2024 New Release - Mission 750 Bookshelf Speakers Overview - Audio Visual Revolution\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Mission","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45980577038509,"sku":"NEW-MNM750-BLK-PR","price":1299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MNM750_BLKOAK_01_2024__28668.1725547691.1280.1280_d3cdf5d8-44ac-4d88-901b-a1ec979e1a2c.jpg?v=1778153900"},{"product_id":"psb-synchrony-b600-premium-bookshelf-speaker-satin-walnut-each","title":"PSB Synchrony B600 Premium Bookshelf Speaker - Satin Walnut - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePSB's Flagship Bookshelf, Sold One Speaker at a Time\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Synchrony B600 is the bookshelf model in PSB's flagship Synchrony series. A 1-inch titanium dome tweeter and a 6.5-inch woven carbon fiber woofer sit in a heavily braced cabinet with an aluminum front baffle. This listing is for one speaker, so order two for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePSB spent two years developing the current Synchrony series, measuring in the anechoic chamber at Canada's National Research Council and using laser vibrometry and finite-element modeling on the cabinet. The B600 arrived in 2021 and has been reviewed by three US publications since.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Drivers and the Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe woofer has a cast aluminum basket and a shorted-turn motor that PSB says lowers distortion. The tweeter sits below the woofer, and a fourth-order Linkwitz-Riley crossover joins them at 2,200 Hz. The front baffle is a 5-millimeter aluminum plate, and IsoAcoustics designed the four isolation feet underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePSB quotes 50 Hz to 20 kHz within 3 dB, with a minus 10 dB bass cutoff of 35 Hz. Anechoic sensitivity is 86 dB. The impedance is 6 ohms nominal with a 4 ohm minimum, and PSB recommends 15 to 150 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA 6 ohm speaker with a 4 ohm minimum wants an amplifier rated for 4 ohm loads. Fifty watts is a comfortable starting point, and the B600 will happily use 150. SoundStage! Hi-Fi measured bass in a small room that reached well below the published figure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 9 inches wide, 15.5 tall and 11.5 deep, and weighs 23 pounds. Finishes are satin walnut or high-gloss black, with a magnetic grille. Two pairs of five-way binding posts allow bi-wiring or bi-amping, and PSB makes a matching stand that mates with the isolation feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDiego Estan reviewed the B600 for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Hi-Fi\u003c\/em\u003e in November 2021: \"The B600 is one of the most complete-sounding small speakers I've ever heard.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChris Eberle of \u003cem\u003eHomeTheaterHifi\u003c\/em\u003e wrote in August 2021: \"They play far beyond their physical presence and will transform your room into a different space.\" He rated the B600 Highly Recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJames Larson of \u003cem\u003eAudioholics\u003c\/em\u003e concluded in May 2023: \"There aren't really any serious weaknesses with the PSB Synchrony B600 at all.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a bookshelf speaker with no obvious weakness\u003c\/strong\u003e — three US reviewers over two years reached the same conclusion\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want deep bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 6.5-inch woofer and a 35 Hz cutoff are as deep as bookshelf speakers go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a solid amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB and a 4 ohm minimum reward 50 watts or more from a well-built integrated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou care about the cabinet as much as the drivers\u003c\/strong\u003e — aluminum baffle, IsoAcoustics feet and furniture-grade walnut or gloss black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want most of the sound for less\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/psb-imagine-b50-bookshelf-speakers-satin\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eImagine B50\u003c\/a\u003e uses a Synchrony-derived tweeter in a smaller cabinet, sold as a pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on the back of each speaker, red to red and black to black. Jumpers link the two pairs of posts for a single cable run. These are passive speakers, so nothing plugs into the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut the B600 on a stand with the tweeter near ear height, and leave several inches behind the cabinet for the rear port. The isolation feet grip the stand top, so the speaker sits without spikes or pads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most Synchrony B600 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/psb-synchrony-sst-24-24-inch-speaker-stands-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePSB Synchrony SST-24 stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 24 inches tall, designed to mate with the B600's isolation feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — choose one rated for 4 ohm loads with 50 watts or more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/psb-subseries-bp8-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePSB SubSeries BP8 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the last few hertz below 35\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — one run per side, or two for bi-wiring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs this listing for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. Order two for a stereo pair, or one to add a center or surround channel to a Synchrony system. Check the title of this listing for the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much power do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePSB recommends 15 to 150 watts per channel. Because the impedance dips to 4 ohms, choose an amplifier rated for 4 ohm speakers, and give it 50 watts or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. PSB quotes 50 Hz within 3 dB and a 35 Hz cutoff, and SoundStage! Hi-Fi measured deeper bass than that in a small room. For film, a subwoofer adds the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat do the isolation feet do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics designed them for PSB. They keep cabinet vibration from reaching the stand, and floor vibration from reaching the speaker. PSB credits them with clearer detail and more precise imaging.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the B600 different from the Imagine B50?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe B600 has a 6.5-inch woofer instead of 5.25, reaches 35 Hz, weighs twice as much and adds the aluminum baffle and isolation feet. The B50 is sold as a pair; the B600 is sold individually.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere are they designed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePSB designs and measures its speakers at Canada's National Research Council acoustics lab, where founder Paul Barton has worked since the 1970s.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteve Guttenberg, the Audiophiliac, on the Synchrony B600:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/yhkE2K45cns\" title=\"PSB Synchrony B600 Lets the Good Times Roll! - Steve Guttenberg Audiophiliac\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSoundStage! Network reviews the Synchrony B600:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/7H70OifBfmM\" title=\"The BEST PSB Speakers for Home Audio? Synchrony B600 Review - SoundStage! Network\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"PSB","offers":[{"title":"Satin Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45980602761389,"sku":"NEW-PBSYB600-SATWAL","price":1899.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/PBSYB600_SATWAL_01-Large__13137.1731267419.1280.1280_b757e995-42a9-45d2-be41-35dbb29c87e3.jpg?v=1778134775"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-silver-100-7g-bookshelf-speakers-black-oak-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Silver 100 7G Bookshelf Speakers - Black Oak - Pair","description":"\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eA Bookshelf Speaker With Bass That Punches Above Its Size\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Silver 100 7G is the standmount model in Monitor Audio's seventh-generation Silver Series, a lineup the company has refined since first introducing it in 1999. Monitor Audio's own pitch is direct: this bookshelf speaker is built to deliver richer sound and deeper bass than many older floorstanding speakers, from a cabinet compact enough to sit on a stand or shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt's aimed at listeners building a serious two-channel music system, or a smaller home theater setup, who want genuine hi-fi performance without committing to full-size floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eA New Tweeter and Mid-Bass Driver Working Together\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA 1-inch C-CAM Gold Dome tweeter with Uniform Dispersion (UD) Waveguide II handles the high frequencies, paired with an 8-inch C-CAM mid-bass driver using Rigid Surface Technology (RST) II and Damped Concentric Mode (DCM) technology for reduced cone breakup and distortion. A new crossover, tuned at 2.3kHz, is designed to blend the two drivers more seamlessly than earlier Silver Series generations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eRear-Ported for Easier Placement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Silver 100 7G uses Monitor Audio's HiVe II rear port system, tuned at 42Hz, designed to make the speaker easier to position in a room without the sound performance changing dramatically based on how close it sits to a wall. Monitor Audio rates in-room frequency response at 35Hz to 35kHz (-6dB), extension unusually deep for a speaker this size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eA Choice of Finishes to Match Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Silver 100 7G is available in Satin White or High Gloss Black painted finishes, as well as real-wood Black Oak, Natural Walnut, and Ash veneers, so it can either blend into a room or stand out as a design piece. Rubber stopper feet are included for stable placement on a shelf or stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eIs the Monitor Audio Silver 100 7G Right for You?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want floorstander-like bass from a bookshelf speaker.\u003c\/strong\u003e Monitor Audio specifically positions the Silver 100 7G's low-end extension as comparable to some floorstanding speakers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a speaker with award-backed credibility.\u003c\/strong\u003e It won Secrets of Home Theater \u0026amp; High Fidelity's Best Bookshelf Speaker of 2023 award, and a Five-Star review from What Hi-Fi?.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want finish flexibility.\u003c\/strong\u003e Two painted finishes and three real-wood veneers give you real choices to match your room's style.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou're comparing this to Monitor Audio's newest Silver 100 8G.\u003c\/strong\u003e The 7G is the previous generation, still in Monitor Audio's current lineup at time of writing; ask us if you'd like a direct comparison to the 8G before deciding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOne honest limitation:\u003c\/strong\u003e this is a fully passive speaker with no built-in amplification, so you'll need a separate amplifier, receiver, or powered preamp to drive it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eSetup, Compatibility \u0026amp; What's Included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Silver 100 7G connects to an amplifier or AV receiver using bi-wire\/bi-amp capable binding posts, and is sold as a pair. At 8 ohms nominal impedance (4.9 ohms minimum) and 87.5dB sensitivity, it pairs well with a wide range of amplifier power levels rather than demanding an unusually powerful amp. Included with each speaker: rubber stopper feet for stable shelf or stand placement. An amplifier or receiver, speaker cable, and stands (if not shelf-mounting) are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.45em 0;line-height:1.5;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eC-CAM Gold Dome Tweeter with UD Waveguide II\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDesigned for more lifelike, natural high-frequency dispersion across the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.45em 0;line-height:1.5;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8-Inch RST II Mid-Bass Driver\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRigid Surface Technology and Damped Concentric Mode reduce cone breakup for extra clarity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.45em 0;line-height:1.5;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHiVe II Rear Port System\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eTuned bass reflex port designed for easier room placement without sacrificing sound quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.45em 0;line-height:1.5;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFloorstander-Like Bass Extension\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRated to 35Hz (-6dB), covering the full range of a bass guitar from a bookshelf cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.45em 0;line-height:1.5;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBi-Wire\/Bi-Amp Capable\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDual binding posts support bi-wiring or bi-amping for listeners who want to experiment further.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.45em 0;line-height:1.5;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFive Finish Options\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eSatin White and High Gloss Black paint, plus Black Oak, Natural Walnut, and Ash real-wood veneers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: 2-way, rear-ported (bass reflex) bookshelf\/standmount speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSold as: pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTweeter: 1″ (25mm) C-CAM Gold Dome with UD Waveguide II\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMid-bass driver: 8″ (203mm) C-CAM with RST II and DCM technology\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCrossover frequency: 2.3kHz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrequency response, in-room (-6dB): 35Hz – 35kHz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSensitivity: 87.5dB @ 2.83V\/1m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNominal impedance: 8Ω; minimum impedance: 4.9Ω @ 170Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum SPL (single, free-field): 106dB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePort tuning frequency: 42Hz (HiVe II)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConnectors: bi-wire\/bi-amp capable binding posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (H × W × D): 375 × 230 × 332mm (14 3\/4″ × 9 1\/16″ × 13 5\/64″)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 9.4kg (10 lb 12 oz) each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinishes: Satin White, High Gloss Black; Black Oak, Natural Walnut, Ash real-wood veneers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarranty: 5 years\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrice: approx. $1,399\/pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eAwards \u0026amp; Expert Reviews\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSecrets of Home Theater \u0026amp; High Fidelity named the Silver 100 7G its Best Bookshelf Speaker of 2023. Reviewer Taps Das called it \"a two-way bookshelf loudspeaker that sounds as big as you would hope it would,\" adding that it is \"absolutely gorgeous in design.\" What Hi-Fi? awarded it Five Stars, writing that \"there's texture to instruments, and space within the mix for the reverbs that dictate much of the atmosphere,\" and concluding that \"these are very much the hi-fi speakers Monitor Audio promised at the outset.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eDo I need a separate amplifier for these speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The Silver 100 7G is a fully passive speaker with no built-in amplification. You'll need an amplifier, integrated amp, or AV receiver to power it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eIs this the newest Monitor Audio Silver Series speaker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo. Monitor Audio has since introduced the Silver 100 8G, the current generation. The Silver 100 7G reviewed here is the previous, seventh generation, still sold and well-reviewed in its own right; ask us if you'd like help comparing the two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eCan these be used for both music and home theater?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Monitor Audio positions the Silver 100 7G as suited to smaller stereo music setups as well as front or rear channel duty in a smaller home theater system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eDo these need stands, or can they sit on a shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEither works. They ship with rubber stopper feet for stable shelf placement, and their compact size and rear-ported design also make them well suited to dedicated speaker stands if you prefer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eWhat amplifier power do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt 8 ohms nominal impedance and 87.5dB sensitivity, the Silver 100 7G is not an unusually demanding speaker to drive, and works with a wide range of amplifier power levels. Give us a call if you'd like help matching it to a specific amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDarko Audio reviews the Monitor Audio Silver 100 7G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/-Lg_-Q4QbCw\" title=\"NO SUBWOOFER REQUIRED: Monitor Audio's Silver 100 7G Limited Edition\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSECRETS of Home Theater and High Fidelity reviews the Silver 100 7G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/9Gy8Ckdgbyk\" title=\"Monitor Audio Silver 100 7G Video Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40+ Years of Expertise\u003c\/strong\u003e – Helping music lovers build better systems since 1981.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e – Hear it in your own system with confidence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal Product Experts\u003c\/strong\u003e – Friendly advice before and after your purchase.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/strong\u003e – On qualifying orders over $49.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible Financing\u003c\/strong\u003e – Convenient payment options available.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980610592941,"sku":"NEW-MRS1007G-BLKOAK-PR","price":1049.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Demo","offer_id":45980610625709,"sku":"DEMO-MRS1007G-BLKOAK-PR","price":1298.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRS1007G_BLKOAK_01-Large__00878.1731259487.1280.1280_1eed71fe-3ef9-48c6-ade2-f75e1ff9a15f.jpg?v=1778100399"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-gold-50-6g-bookshelf-speaker-high-gloss-black-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Gold 50 6G Bookshelf Speaker - High Gloss Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Smallest Gold, and Why That Is the Point\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 50 6G is the compact two-way in Monitor Audio’s Gold Series 6G. One 6-inch HDT C-CAM mid-bass driver and one MPD III pleated tweeter share a cabinet just over a foot tall, crossing over at 2.5 kHz. It is the model in the range built for smaller rooms and real stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSmall does not mean entry-level here. The driver technology is the same HDT cone and MPD III tweeter used in the larger Gold models, and the build is the same. What you give up against a Gold 100 6G is bass extension and a dedicated midrange driver, not the quality of what remains.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHDT, and Why the Cones Are Hexagons\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHDT stands for Hexagonal Diaphragm Technology, Monitor Audio’s newest metal cone. In its own words, the cone \"employs a hexagonal pattern to disrupt symmetries in the cone breakup\", which is a precise way of saying the cone stays a piston for longer before it starts to ring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes 55 Hz to 60 kHz free-field at minus 6 dB, and 44 Hz to 60 kHz in-room. Sensitivity is 85 dB. Nominal impedance is 4 ohms, and the minimum is 4.0 ohms at 225 Hz, so the load stays close to its rating across the band.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe recommended amplifier is 130 to 300 watts into 4 ohms, and peak output is quoted at 114 dB. The rear HiVe II port is tuned to 50 Hz. Each cabinet measures 12.6 by 7.3 by 11.9 inches and weighs 18 pounds 12 ounces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMPD III, the Tweeter That Is Not a Dome\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe high frequencies come from a Micro Pleated Diaphragm rather than a dome. Monitor Audio says the latest MPD III \"delivers precise high-frequency sound with greater consistency, clarity and accuracy\". It is the same family of tweeter the company uses further up its range, including in the Gold 100 6G.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby reviewed the Gold 50 6G on video for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e on March 22, 2026, and came away impressed. He found that \"the precise diction around the vocals meant that lyrics were far easier to discern\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHe also highlighted a \"deeper, more forceful bass performance\" and \"a sense of rightness about the upper mid-range\". Those excerpts are as Monitor Audio published them from the review; the video is embedded below so you can hear his reasoning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want Gold Series sound in a smaller room\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is the compact model in the range, sized for rooms where a Gold 100 6G would be too much speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own, or plan to buy, a strong amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 4 ohms nominal and a 130 to 300 watt recommendation rule out small integrateds; one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e with real current is the match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to voices\u003c\/strong\u003e — Rigby’s point about \"precise diction around the vocals\" is what a pleated tweeter crossing at 2.5 kHz tends to deliver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou may add a subwoofer later\u003c\/strong\u003e — 44 Hz in-room is honest for the size, and a sub fills in the rest without asking the speaker to strain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are furnishing a mixed music and film room\u003c\/strong\u003e — 114 dB of peak output is more headroom than a compact box usually offers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on the back of each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet them on stands, bring the tweeter to ear height, and give the rear port room to breathe. Then angle them in toward your seat. A 4 ohm speaker also deserves a cable of sensible gauge for the length of the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Gold 50 6G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a rear-ported speaker at 18 pounds 12 ounces each belongs on a stand, not a shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 to 300 watts into 4 ohms, with current to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a low-loss run sized for a 4 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural partner below 44 Hz, for music or film\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I really need a big amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Monitor Audio rates the speaker at 4 ohms nominal and recommends 130 to 300 watts into that load. Sensitivity is a modest 85 dB, so a small amplifier will run out of headroom well before the speaker does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePhysically, yes: each cabinet is 12.6 inches tall, 7.3 wide and 11.9 deep. Acoustically, the rear port wants space behind it, so a stand a foot or more from the wall will sound better than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does it differ from the Gold 100 6G?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 100 6G is a three-way with an 8-inch bass driver, a dedicated midrange and deeper bass. The Gold 50 6G is a two-way for smaller rooms. Both share the HDT cone and MPD III tweeter; the whole \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/monitor-audio-gold\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGold range\u003c\/a\u003e is here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is an MPD tweeter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA Micro Pleated Diaphragm: a folded, ribbon-like membrane rather than a dome. Monitor Audio’s third-generation version is here, the same design family as its dearer ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFor most music in a small or medium room, no. Monitor Audio quotes 44 Hz in-room at minus 6 dB. For film, or for organ and electronic bass, a subwoofer will add the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are there?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMacassar wood veneer, High-Gloss Black and Satin White. Monitor Audio covers the speakers with a five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby of The Audiophile Man reviews the Gold 50 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/qOBRstdgWCA\" title=\"Monitor Audio Gold 50 6G Review: Small Speakers, Serious Audiophile Performance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio introduces the Gold Series 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/eAFKdUtPCE0\" title=\"A Contemporary Classic: Gold Series 6G\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about matching an amplifier to a 4 ohm load, choosing speaker stands, or adding a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45980623274157,"sku":"NEW-MRG6G50-BLK-PR","price":2749.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRG6G50-BLK-PR_01_angle_2024__64715.1731256127.1280.1280_a741a0ef-f2b6-44e2-8656-035cef3f3dd0.jpg?v=1778157890"},{"product_id":"mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-8-loudspeakers-walnut-with-stands-pair","title":"MoFi Electronics SourcePoint 8 Loudspeakers - Walnut with Stands - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAndrew Jones's Point-Source Speaker, in a Size for Real Rooms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe SourcePoint 8 is the smaller of Andrew Jones's two concentric standmounts for MoFi Electronics. An 8-inch woofer carries a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter at its center, so both drivers launch sound from one point. The cabinet is 18 inches tall, and the speakers are sold as a pair, with or without MoFi's matching stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJones designed concentric drivers at KEF, Pioneer, TAD and ELAC before MoFi. His idea here is a two-way with a woofer large enough to reach the bass. The tweeter never has to strain, and the crossover can sit low, at 1.6 kHz. The woofer cone doubles as a waveguide for the tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy One Point Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhen treble and midrange come from the same spot, the sound stays the same as you move around the room. The stereo image holds together. MoFi's Twin-Drive motor uses two neodymium magnets for a symmetrical field, which the company says cuts intermodulation distortion. A faceted baffle reduces diffraction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi quotes 47 Hz to 30 kHz, 87 dB sensitivity and 8 ohms nominal with a 6.4 ohm minimum. The minimum recommended power is 30 watts. The maximum input is 150 watts. Stereophile measured the sensitivity as specified and called it an easy load, so tube amplifiers are a real option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.4 inches wide, 18 tall and 12.6 deep without the grille, and weighs 27.9 pounds. Finishes are satin walnut or satin black ash real-wood veneer, or painted satin white. Magnetic grilles are included, and a single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. The warranty is five years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the SourcePoint 8 in Class B of its Recommended Components, 2025 and 2026 editions. The entry cites Kalman Rubinson's review: \"they generate a fairly wide and deep soundstage that is notably transparent and detailed.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNeil Gader of \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e gave it a 2024 Golden Ear Award: \"Bass response is forceful, controlled, and accurate in pitch.\" He added: \"I called it the most satisfying compact I'd heard all year. I still do.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDave Berriman reviewed it for \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e on February 13, 2024, finding \"an uncanny ability to set up precise stereo images within an almost holographic soundstage.\" Stereophile noted little output below 50 Hz, but \"tight, powerful bass\" above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want pinpoint imaging and a wide sweet spot\u003c\/strong\u003e — the concentric driver is why three reviewers led with the soundstage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a tube amplifier or a modest integrated\u003c\/strong\u003e — 87 dB, 8 ohms and a 6.4 ohm minimum make an easy load; 30 watts is enough\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a big-speaker sound in a medium room\u003c\/strong\u003e — an 8-inch woofer and an 18-inch cabinet give scale that 5-inch two-ways cannot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want it to look like furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — book-matched veneer, a faceted baffle and magnetic grilles in three finishes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the deepest bass and highest efficiency\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-10-master-edition-loudspeakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSourcePoint 10 Master Edition\u003c\/a\u003e adds a 10-inch driver, 42 Hz extension and 91 dB sensitivity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. Any integrated or tube amplifier of 30 watts or more will drive them well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the driver near ear height, a foot or more from the wall behind the rear port. Stereophile found the clearest center image with the speakers toed in about halfway between straight ahead and aimed at the seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most SourcePoint 8 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-sourcepoint-8-speaker-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi SourcePoint 8 stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sized to the cabinet footprint, or choose the with-stands version of this listing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the easy load and 87 dB sensitivity suit low-power tube designs as well as solid state\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-ultradeck\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi UltraDeck turntable\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-studiophono-mm-mc-phono-preamplifier\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi StudioPhono phono preamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a matching MoFi analog front end\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the octave below 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the SourcePoint 8 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with grilles. Choose the version with stands if you want MoFi's matching stands in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi recommends at least 30 watts and rates the speaker for 150 watts maximum. Stereophile called it an easy load, so tube amplifiers and small integrateds are fine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a concentric driver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA tweeter mounted at the center of the woofer. Both drivers radiate from the same point. The sound stays consistent off axis and the stereo image is precise. Andrew Jones has built speakers this way for decades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. MoFi quotes 47 Hz and Stereophile heard tight, powerful bass above 50 Hz. For film or deep electronic bass, a subwoofer completes it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 8 different from the SourcePoint 10 Master Edition?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 10 has a 10-inch driver, reaches 42 Hz, is 4 dB more sensitive and weighs 46 pounds each. The 8 is two-thirds the size and fits rooms and stands the 10 cannot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSatin walnut or satin black ash real-wood veneer, or painted satin white. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the SourcePoint 8:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/3DQERxkB92k\" title=\"Is this REALLY an ANDREW JONES Speaker? SourcePoint 8 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the SourcePoint 8:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/h90tqdGsgP4\" title=\"Why Do People Love the MoFi SourcePoint 8? - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MoFi Electronics","offers":[{"title":"Walnut with Stands \/ New","offer_id":45981150642349,"sku":"NEW-MOSP8-WALSTA","price":2594.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/sourcepoint-8-walnut-facing-right-corrected.jpg?v=1785703715"},{"product_id":"elac-debut-2-0-b6-2-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair","title":"ELAC Debut 2.0 B6.2 Bookshelf Speakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Second-Generation Debut That Earned Five Stars\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Debut 2.0 B6.2 is the larger standmount from ELAC's second Debut generation. A 1-inch cloth dome tweeter in a wide-dispersion waveguide sits above a 6.5-inch woven aramid-fiber woofer, with a front-firing dual-flared port beneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Jones redesigned everything from the original Debut B6: new drivers, a crossover at 2,200 Hz, and a larger, braced MDF cabinet. The tweeter extends to 35 kHz, and the aramid cone was reshaped for stiffness and damping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Front Port for Easy Placement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBecause the port fires forward, the B6.2 is more tolerant of a shelf or a wall behind it than a rear-ported speaker. That is a practical advantage the newer Debut 3.0, with its rear port, gave up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC quotes 44 Hz to 35 kHz, 87 dB sensitivity at 2.83 volts and a 6 ohm nominal impedance, with a maximum input of 120 watts. That is an easy load, and any integrated amplifier or receiver will drive a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 7.7 inches wide, 14.8 tall and 10.6 deep, and weighs 16.3 pounds. The finish is black ash vinyl over thick, braced MDF, and 5-way metal binding posts are fitted on the back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e gave the Debut 2.0 B6.2 five stars on February 26, 2020: \"the Elac B6.2s are mature, transparent performers that confidently outline just what the rest of your system is doing.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThey called it \"a punchy and rhythmic performance\" and closed with: \"If you want a faithful representation of what the rest of your system can do, the Elac Debut 2.0 B6.2 speakers will deliver just that.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a five-star speaker at a closeout price\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is the model that won What Hi-Fi? over, and this is the last stock of it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have to sit near a wall\u003c\/strong\u003e — the front port makes a shelf or a tight spot far more workable than most standmounts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want honesty, not flattery\u003c\/strong\u003e — What Hi-Fi? praised its transparency; it shows what your amplifier and source are doing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is an ordinary receiver\u003c\/strong\u003e — 87 dB into 6 ohms is an easy load for any \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e or receiver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the newest version\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/elac-debut-3-0-b6-3-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eDebut 3.0 B6.3\u003c\/a\u003e replaces this speaker with an aluminum tweeter, a rear port and a choice of finishes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to a single pair of 5-way binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn stands, aim them roughly at the seat. On a shelf, the front port means you only need a little clearance behind the cabinet. Give the drivers a few weeks of playing before judging the bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most B6.2 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 120 watts into 6 ohms; a clean one, since these speakers are honest about the source\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 24 inches puts the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/elac-ds103-10-inch-powered-subwoofer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eELAC DS103 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — ELAC's 10-inch sub for film below 44 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a sensible gauge for a 6 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the B6.2 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, with two grilles in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs this speaker discontinued?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. ELAC has replaced the Debut 2.0 line with Debut 3.0, and this listing is remaining stock. It carries the same warranty and our 60-day guarantee as any new speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSensitivity is 87 dB into 6 ohms and maximum input is 120 watts. Anything from about 30 watts works well, and a small receiver is fine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan they go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, and better than most. The port fires forward, so only a few inches of clearance behind the cabinet is needed. They are 14.8 inches tall, so measure the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The B6.2 reaches 44 Hz, and What Hi-Fi? noted ample bass without strain. For film, a subwoofer adds the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the B6.2 different from the B6.3?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/elac-debut-3-0-b6-3-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eB6.3\u003c\/a\u003e moves to an aluminum dome tweeter, a rear port, a magnetic grille and a walnut option. The B6.2 keeps the cloth dome and the front port, which some listeners prefer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eZero Fidelity reviews the B6.2:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/JLvodAEiveA\" title=\"Review! The ELAC B6.2 (Debut 2.0) loudspeaker - Zero Fidelity\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNew Record Day's first impressions:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/zbiLQgxg9CE\" title=\"Elac Debut B6.2 First Impressions! - New Record Day\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"ELAC","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981151658157,"sku":"NEW-ELDB62-PBLK","price":399.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"Cosmetically Blemished","offer_id":45981151756461,"sku":"BLEM-ELDB62-PBLK","price":339.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/ELDB62_BLK_3QT3-Large__74106.1731083356.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778145818"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-xt-b100-bookshelf-speaker-walnut-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion XT B100 Bookshelf Speaker - Walnut - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMartinLogan's Biggest Folded Motion Tweeter, in a Box You Can Shelve\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion XT B100 is the top bookshelf speaker in MartinLogan's Motion range. It pairs the Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion XT tweeter with a 6.5-inch Nomex-reinforced Kevlar woofer in a rear-ported cabinet. It is 14.5 inches tall and sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan is best known for electrostatic panels. The Folded Motion tweeter brings some of that character to a conventional box. A pleated film diaphragm squeezes air between its folds, so it barely has to move. The XT version has 12.4 square inches of surface, 40 percent more than the standard tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Folded Diaphragm Sounds Different\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA dome tweeter pushes air with a small cup. The folded film moves far less for the same output, which lowers distortion and keeps the treble clean at high volume. A molded waveguide, chosen from nearly 50 profiles, matches its dispersion to the woofer at the 2,600 Hz crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 45 Hz to 25 kHz within 3 dB and 93 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 4 ohms. Recommended power is 20 to 250 watts. Dispersion is 90 degrees horizontal and 45 degrees vertical, so tweeter height matters more than with most speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8 inches wide, 14.5 tall and 12.5 deep with feet, and weighs 20.5 pounds. Finishes are gloss black, walnut and satin white. The 5-way binding posts are doubled for bi-wiring or bi-amping. A threaded insert in the base bolts to the STAND25 stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMark Gusew reviewed the XT B100 for \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e on July 19, 2023: \"From the moment I started my listening sessions, I was impressed by how balanced a musical communicator this little loudspeaker is.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNasim Abbu-Daggar reviewed it for \u003cem\u003eFuture Audiophile\u003c\/em\u003e on October 9, 2024: \"The Folded Motion tweeter excelled in bringing an incredible amount of detail and sparkle to the upper registers.\" Bass was \"tight and controlled.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis caution: a \"relatively narrow horizontal sweet spot.\" Off to the side the sound thins, so the XT B100 rewards a well-placed seat more than a scattered crowd.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the MartinLogan sound without panels\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest Folded Motion tweeter MartinLogan makes, in a cabinet that sits on a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to detail\u003c\/strong\u003e — strings, cymbals and voices are where both reviewers heard the XT B100 pull ahead\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Motion home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-mp10-multi-purpose-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion MP10\u003c\/a\u003e surrounds share the tweeter, so the system speaks with one voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier can drive 4 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e — 93 dB sensitivity means little power is needed, but the load is 4 ohms, so check your amplifier's rating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a wide sweet spot for a crowd\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 45 degree vertical dispersion and focused imaging favor a seated listener; for wide seating, consider the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e with its 90 by 90 degree pattern\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. For a single run, leave the jumpers between the two pairs of posts in place. Remove them to bi-wire or bi-amp. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, a foot or more from the wall behind the rear port. Toe them in toward the seat. Future Audiophile placed them about two and a half feet from the back wall and toed in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most XT B100 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — bolts to the base and puts the tweeter at ear height, with color-matched trim\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center for a Motion XT home theater\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-10-powered-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan Dynamo 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for the octave below 45 Hz on film and bass-heavy music\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 4 ohm rated amplifier of 50 watts or more is plenty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Motion range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround or height channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 20 to 250 watts. At 93 dB sensitivity it plays loud on modest power, but the 4 ohm impedance means the amplifier should be rated for 4 ohm loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire or bi-amp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The XT B100 has two pairs of 5-way binding posts with jumpers. It is the only Motion bookshelf model with this option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the XT B100 and the Motion B10?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe XT B100 has the larger XT tweeter, a 6.5-inch Kevlar woofer and deeper bass, 45 Hz against 56 Hz. It is also two inches taller and 6 pounds heavier. The B10 has a wider vertical dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. The XT B100 reaches 45 Hz. For film, or if you want the lowest octave with real weight, add a subwoofer and cross over around 60 to 80 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it come with a grille?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA clip-on cover for the woofer is supplied. The tweeter sits in its waveguide and stays exposed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Motion XT B100:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/mJiqHCn2SV0\" title=\"Greatness for LESS - Martin Logan Motion XT B100 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the XT B100 and B10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/XXTBJbb3naU\" title=\"Martin Logan XT B100 and B10 Review (LIVE) - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981162373293,"sku":"NEW-MLXTB100-WAL","price":679.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLXTB100_WAL_01-Large__54361.1731171712.1280.1280_15fcb978-31db-4b45-a8ae-b4f8388e293b.jpg?v=1778144227"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-gold-100-6g-bookshelf-speaker-macassar-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Gold 100 6G Bookshelf Speaker - Macassar - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThree Drivers, a Ribbon-Style Tweeter, and a Stand-Mount Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 100 6G is a true three-way in a standmount cabinet. An 8-inch HDT C-CAM bass driver, a 3-inch HDT C-CAM midrange driver and an MPD III tweeter each take their own band, with crossovers at 700 Hz and 2.6 kHz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree-way standmounts are rare because they are hard to do well. Reviewers keep reaching for the same comparison here, and it is not to other bookshelf speakers. It is to small floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHDT, and Why the Cones Are Hexagons\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHDT stands for Hexagonal Diaphragm Technology, Monitor Audio’s newest metal cone. In its own words, the cone \"employs a hexagonal pattern to disrupt symmetries in the cone breakup\", which is a precise way of saying the cone stays a piston for longer before it starts to ring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes an in-room response of 32 Hz to 60 kHz at minus 6 dB, and 49 Hz to 60 kHz free-field. Sensitivity is 86.5 dB. Nominal impedance is 4 ohms, with a minimum of 3.9 ohms at 140 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat 4 ohm rating matters. The recommendation is 130 to 500 watts into 4 ohms, and peak output is quoted at 119 dB. The rear HiVe II port is tuned to 38 Hz. This speaker wants a serious amplifier, and rewards one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMPD III, the Tweeter That Is Not a Dome\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe high frequencies come from a Micro Pleated Diaphragm rather than a dome. Monitor Audio says the latest MPD III \"delivers precise high-frequency sound with greater consistency, clarity and accuracy\". It is the same family of tweeter the company uses further up its range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLee Dunkley gave them a Recommended badge in \u003cem\u003eAudiograde\u003c\/em\u003e on January 25, 2025: \"The bigger design pays off to deliver one of the most enjoyable and insightful sounds I’ve heard in a long time.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Schryer, in \u003cem\u003ePMA Magazine\u003c\/em\u003e on February 13, 2025: \"Not once during my audition of the British speakers did I think, ‘They need a subwoofer.’ The 100s sounded complete.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth flag the same practical point. Dunkley notes that \"despite the bookshelf categorisation, you’ll need to factor in the additional cost of a pair of dedicated speaker stands\". At nearly 31 pounds each, he is right.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want floorstander scale without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Australia\u003c\/em\u003e found they provide \"small floorstander levels of dynamic expression and low frequency depth coupled to a more compact form factor\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen for detail\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same review called them \"a lively, captivating loudspeaker capable of outstanding levels of detail and resolution\", which is what a dedicated midrange and a pleated tweeter are for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own a powerful amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 4 ohm nominal load with a 130 to 500 watt recommendation is not a job for a small integrated; one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e with real current, or a power amplifier, is the match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is mid-sized\u003c\/strong\u003e — Dunkley calls them \"easy to install speakers ideally suited to mid-sized rooms\", and 119 dB of headroom means they will not run out of room in one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBudget for stands\u003c\/strong\u003e — 17.6 inches tall and 30 pounds 14 ounces each puts these well past what a shelf should carry, so a dedicated pair of stands is part of the purchase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on the back of each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet them on stands rated for the weight, bring the tweeter to ear height, and give the rear port room to breathe. Then angle them in toward your seat. A 4 ohm speaker also deserves a cable of sensible gauge for the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Gold 100 6G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — not optional at nearly 31 pounds each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 to 500 watts into 4 ohms, with current to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a low-loss run sized for a 4 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional at 32 Hz, but there for film\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I really need a big amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Monitor Audio rates the speaker at 4 ohms nominal and recommends 130 to 500 watts into that load. The reviewers who praise it were driving it properly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRealistically, they will not. Each cabinet is 17.6 inches tall, 9.1 wide and 14.1 deep, and weighs 30 pounds 14 ounces. They belong on stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow low does the bass go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes 32 Hz in-room at minus 6 dB, with the port tuned to 38 Hz. One reviewer never once wished for a subwoofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is an MPD tweeter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA Micro Pleated Diaphragm: a folded, ribbon-like membrane rather than a dome. Monitor Audio’s third-generation version is here, and it is the same design family as its dearer ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are there?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMacassar wood veneer, High-Gloss Black and Satin White. Monitor Audio covers the speakers with a five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs there anything above this in the range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot among our bookshelf speakers. The Gold 100 6G is the top standmount we carry from Monitor Audio; beyond it, the Gold range moves to floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio introduces the Gold Series 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/eAFKdUtPCE0\" title=\"A Contemporary Classic: Gold Series 6G\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA British Audiophile spends fifteen minutes with a pair:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/YhvyhL69Ggw\" title=\"Monitor Audio Gold 100 6G Speaker Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about three-way speakers, matching an amplifier to a 4 ohm load, or choosing speaker stands? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"Macassar \/ New","offer_id":45981165617325,"sku":"NEW-MRG6G100-MAC-PR","price":4599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRG6G100-MAC-PR_01_angle_2024__79433.1731255585.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778157662"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-mp10-multi-purpose-speaker-satin-white-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion MP10 Multi-Purpose Speaker - Satin White - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Motion Speaker Built for Walls and Shallow Shelves\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion MP10 is the multi-purpose model in MartinLogan's Motion range. It uses the same Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion tweeter and 5.5-inch woven fiberglass woofer as the Motion B10, in a cabinet only 5 inches deep. It is sold by the each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shallow cabinet is the point. A Stealth Bass Port lets the MP10 reach bass output close to a normal bookshelf speaker at half the depth. A wall bracket is included, and the cabinet's angled shape lets it mount flat to the wall or flipped upside down.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy the Folded Motion Tweeter Matters Here\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA pleated film diaphragm squeezes air between its folds, so it barely has to move. It keeps treble clean and fast. Because the MP10 shares its tweeter with the B10, XT B100 and Motion towers, it blends with them as a surround, height or rear channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 81 Hz to 25 kHz within 3 dB and 92 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 20 to 200 watts, and dispersion is 90 degrees both ways. The crossover sits at 2,100 Hz. The 81 Hz limit tells you this is a speaker for surround duty or a subwoofer partnership.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8 inches wide, 14 tall and 5 deep with feet, and weighs 9.7 pounds. Finishes are gloss black, walnut and satin white. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. The mounting bracket is in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWe have not found a published written review of the MP10 on its own. Reviewers who use it treat it as the surround and height speaker of the Motion system. Shane Lee's video review below shows it in that role.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Motion home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the MP10 is the surround and height speaker made for the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-b100-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT B100\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e and Motion towers, with the same tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need speakers on the wall\u003c\/strong\u003e — 5 inches deep with a bracket in the box, mountable flat or flipped for high placement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a shallow shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Stealth port keeps bass output up where a normal rear port would need room behind\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a receiver\u003c\/strong\u003e — 92 dB sensitivity and a 5 ohm load suit any AV receiver channel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want it as your main stereo pair\u003c\/strong\u003e — it can do that in a small room, but the 81 Hz limit means you will want a subwoofer; for main duty without one, choose the Motion B10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the binding posts, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. For surround use, set your receiver's crossover for these channels at 80 Hz or higher.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn a wall, use the included bracket and choose the angle that points the tweeter toward the seats. Flipped mounting suits high side walls. On a shelf, the shallow cabinet needs only a little clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most MP10 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center for a Motion XT front stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-10-powered-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan Dynamo 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — essential if the MP10 is a main channel, and welcome in any surround system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a receiver with room correction sets the crossover and levels for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — in-wall rated cable for surround runs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. Order two for a stereo or surround pair, or four for surrounds and heights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the wall bracket included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The bracket is in the box and allows flat or flipped mounting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use the MP10 as a main speaker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIn a small room with a subwoofer, yes. Its 81 Hz low limit is higher than a normal bookshelf speaker, so plan on a subwoofer crossed over at 80 to 100 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 20 to 200 watts. At 92 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, any receiver channel will do.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it match the Motion B10 and XT B100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. It shares the Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion tweeter and the woven fiberglass woofer with the B10, so timbre matches across the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShane Lee reviews a Motion system with the MP10 as surrounds:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PGqHkArXsKo\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Series Review - Motion F20, C10, MP10 - Shane Lee\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHiFi Home Theater's performance review of the MP10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/aUeB0v6l5FI\" title=\"Martin Logan Motion MP10 - Performance review - HiFi Home Theater\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Satin White \/ New","offer_id":45981167714477,"sku":"NEW-MLMOMP10-SATWHT","price":439.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOMP10_SATWHT_01-Large__89853.1731170625.1280.1280_2c4ad612-193b-4401-911c-810ca4e0088c.jpg?v=1778145568"},{"product_id":"bowers-wilkins-606-s3-bookshelf-speakers-white-pair","title":"Bowers \u0026 Wilkins 606 S3 Bookshelf Speakers - White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Continuum Cone, in a Cabinet That Fits a Shelf\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 606 S3 is a two-way vented-box standmount. A 6.5-inch Continuum cone handles bass and midrange. Above it sits a 1-inch Decoupled Double Dome Titanium tweeter, behind the acoustically transparent grille mesh B\u0026amp;W developed for its Signature models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eContinuum is the cone material B\u0026amp;W developed over eight years for the 800 Series Diamond. It replaced Kevlar across the range. The point of it is a midrange that changes character less as the cone moves, which is where voices live.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBigger Than a Compact, Smaller Than a Floorstander\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet stands 13.6 inches tall, 7.4 wide and 12.9 deep including the grille and terminals. Each weighs 15.5 pounds. That is a real standmount rather than a mini monitor, and it wants a shelf with some depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere the Bottom End Comes From\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear-firing Flowport vents the cabinet. B\u0026amp;W quotes a frequency range of 40 Hz to 33 kHz at minus 6 dB, and a response of 52 Hz to 28 kHz within 3 dB of the reference axis. The port needs air behind it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSensitivity is 88 dB at 2.83 volts and one meter. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms, dipping to a minimum of 3.7 ohms. Harmonic distortion stays under 1 percent from 100 Hz to 22 kHz, and under 0.5 percent through the midband.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTerminals Borrowed From the Series Above\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe binding posts come from B\u0026amp;W’s 700 Series, with a rearranged layout and a shorter path between amplifier and driver. B\u0026amp;W asks that speaker cable stay under 0.1 ohms of impedance, which means not skimping on the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e gave the 606 S3 five stars on August 24, 2023, and named it a 2024 Award winner: \"With improvements throughout, these admirable 606 S3s are pleasingly large-scaled, spacious and refined performers for the money\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNasim Abbu-Daggar in \u003cem\u003efutureaudiophile.com\u003c\/em\u003e, June 3, 2024: \"If you’re serious about sound and ready to invest in an audiophile experience that will reward you for years to come, the 606 S3 demands your attention.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the house sound without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Continuum cone and Titanium Dome tweeter come from the same thinking as B\u0026amp;W’s larger ranges, so you get that character in a cabinet a shelf can hold\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is a normal room\u003c\/strong\u003e — 88 dB sensitivity and an 8 ohm nominal load suit ordinary living spaces and ordinary amplifiers, rather than needing a dedicated listening room to make sense\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou care what happens to voices\u003c\/strong\u003e — distortion stays under half a percent through the midband, which is the range a singer occupies and where a cheaper cone usually starts to color things\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are ready to place them properly\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Flowport fires backward, so a few inches of clearance behind each cabinet turns the bass from boomy into taut without any other change\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCheck what your amplifier can deliver\u003c\/strong\u003e — B\u0026amp;W asks for 30 to 120 watts into 8 ohms on unclipped programme, and the load dips to 3.7 ohms; if your amplifier sits below that window, pair them with one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e that can hold it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRun speaker cable from your amplifier to the single pair of binding posts on each cabinet. Spades, bananas and bare wire all fit. Keep the two runs the same length so both speakers see the same cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThen get the tweeters near ear height and give the rear port room. Stands are the usual answer and are not included. Toe them in toward the listening seat and adjust from there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most 606 S3 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — not in the box, and the fastest single improvement you can make\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — B\u0026amp;W asks for under 0.1 ohms, so gauge and length matter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — anything in the 30 to 120 watt window is a match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for the octave below 52 Hz that no cabinet this size reaches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier do these need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W recommends 30 to 120 watts into 8 ohms on unclipped programme. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms with a minimum of 3.7, so pick an amplifier comfortable driving that dip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre stands included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStands are a separate purchase. A shelf works, provided the rear port has clearance and the tweeters end up somewhere near ear height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow far from the wall should they sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGive the rear Flowport a few inches to breathe. Closer to the wall adds bass weight, further out tightens it, so move them and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow low do they go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W quotes 52 Hz within 3 dB, and 40 Hz at minus 6 dB. That covers most music. Add a subwoofer if you want the bottom octave for films.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a Continuum cone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is the composite cone material B\u0026amp;W developed over eight years and introduced on the 800 Series Diamond. It is designed to behave consistently as it moves, rather than changing character partway.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow big and heavy are they?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 13.6 inches tall, 7.4 wide and 12.9 deep with the grille and terminals, and weighs 15.5 pounds. They ship as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTaps Das reviews the 606 S3:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/UHTMXo6zStQ\" title=\"Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 606 S3 Bookshelf Speaker Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Listening Post spends thirteen minutes with a pair:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/hwvx-iLiqYs\" title=\"Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 606 S3 Bookshelf Speakers | The Listening Post | TLPCHC TLPWLG\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, matching an amplifier to your speakers, or bookshelf speakers generally? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Bowers and Wilkins","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45981183934637,"sku":"NEW-BW606S3-WHT","price":1200.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/BW606S3_WHT_01_2023__23097.1730952297.1280.1280_91f6b2d9-afbe-472b-a77f-af835734cc0b.jpg?v=1778147336"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker-satin-white-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion B10 Bookshelf Speaker - Satin White - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Compact Motion, With the Folded Motion Tweeter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion B10 is the smaller of MartinLogan's two Motion bookshelf speakers. It pairs the Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion tweeter with a 5.5-inch woven fiberglass woofer in a rear-ported cabinet. It stands 12.5 inches tall and is sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan is best known for electrostatic panels. The Folded Motion tweeter brings some of that character to a box speaker. A pleated film diaphragm squeezes air between its folds, so it barely has to move. The B10's tweeter has 9.2 square inches of surface, several times that of a 1-inch dome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Folded Diaphragm Sounds Different\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA dome tweeter pushes air with a small cup. The folded film moves far less for the same output, which lowers distortion and keeps the treble clean when you turn up the volume. A molded waveguide matches its dispersion to the woofer at the 2,370 Hz crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 56 Hz to 25 kHz within 3 dB and 92 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 20 to 200 watts. Dispersion is 90 degrees both ways, so the B10 is forgiving about seat height and works well as a surround.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 7 inches wide, 12.5 tall and 9.75 deep with feet, and weighs 14.5 pounds. Finishes are gloss black, walnut and satin white. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits below the port. A threaded insert in the base bolts to the STAND25 stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eKen Kessler reviewed the Motion B10 for \u003cem\u003eHi-Fi News\u003c\/em\u003e on November 13, 2023, calling it the baby of the range and adding that \"this little box is full of big surprises!\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn character: \"the Motion B10 immediately declares itself to be 'lively'\", which he found a good match for tube amplifiers. Even 10 to 15 watt vintage amplifiers gave ample volume in his room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis placement warning: \"proximity to a back wall seriously undermines bass quality.\" He found the tweeters at their best at exactly ear level, on solid stands, in free space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the MartinLogan sound in a small footprint\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Folded Motion tweeter in a cabinet under 10 inches deep\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a small or medium room\u003c\/strong\u003e — 56 Hz bass and 92 dB sensitivity suit apartments, dens and desks with a little space behind\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want wide seating\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 90 by 90 degree dispersion gives more than one chair the good seat, and makes the B10 a natural Motion surround speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a modest amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 20 watts is enough, and the 5 ohm load is easy for receivers and integrated amplifiers alike\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want deep bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-b100-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT B100\u003c\/a\u003e, which reaches 45 Hz with the larger XT tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. The posts take banana plugs, spades, pins or bare wire. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, well clear of the wall behind the rear port. Hi-Fi News preferred them firing straight ahead rather than toed in, and found position mattered more than stand mass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Motion B10 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — bolts to the base and puts the tweeter at ear height, with color-matched trim\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-10-powered-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan Dynamo 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — crossed over near 60 to 80 Hz, it fills in the octave the B10 leaves out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center for a Motion home theater\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — almost anything from 20 watts up will drive it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Motion range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround or height channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 20 to 200 watts. At 92 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, a small integrated amplifier or any receiver will drive it comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan it sit on a shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, at under 10 inches deep it fits most shelves. Leave a few inches behind the rear port, and expect tighter bass and better imaging on stands away from the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the B10 and the XT B100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe XT B100 has a larger tweeter, a 6.5-inch Kevlar woofer, deeper bass and bi-wire posts. The B10 is smaller, lighter, easier on the amplifier and has wider vertical dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFor music at moderate levels, no. The B10 reaches 56 Hz. For film or bass-heavy music, a subwoofer takes over below 60 to 80 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it come with a grille?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA press-in fabric cover for the woofer is supplied. The tweeter sits in its waveguide and stays exposed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eReviews By WaveTheory reviews the Motion B10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/D47YKAGN8iw\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion B10 Bookshelf Speakers Review - Reviews By WaveTheory\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the XT B100 and B10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/XXTBJbb3naU\" title=\"Martin Logan XT B100 and B10 Review (LIVE) - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Satin White \/ New","offer_id":45981186162861,"sku":"NEW-MLMOB10-SATWHT","price":519.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOB10_SATWHT_01-Large__49302.1731099043.1280.1280_d51cfeb7-ebf8-4966-acda-28576a9c8d2c.jpg?v=1778130895"},{"product_id":"polk-audio-reserve-r100-bookshelf-speakers-white-pair","title":"Polk Audio Reserve R100 Bookshelf Speakers - White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePolk's Legend-Series Drivers in a 13-Inch Cabinet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Reserve R100 is the smaller of Polk Audio's two Reserve bookshelf speakers. It uses the same 1-inch Pinnacle ring radiator tweeter and Turbine Cone woofer design as Polk's flagship Legend series, in a cabinet under 13 inches tall. The speakers are sold as a pair in black, white or brown.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk launched the Reserve series in 2021 as the step below Legend. Every Reserve model shares the same tweeter and cone design. A pair of R100s can start a stereo system now and become the surround channels of a Reserve home theater later, with the same voice front to back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Drivers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tweeter has a pointed center plug and a waveguide that Polk says widens the sweet spot and controls dispersion. The 5.25-inch woofer uses a molded foam-core cone with a turbine pattern, for stiffness without added weight. The two drivers cross over at 2,700 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk quotes an overall response of 44 Hz to 50 kHz, with the minus 3 dB limits at 58 Hz and 39 kHz. Sensitivity is 86 dB at 2.83 volts. The minimum impedance is 3.6 ohms, and the recommended amplifier power is 30 to 150 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat impedance dip is why the R100 wants an amplifier or receiver that is comfortable with 4-ohm speakers. Polk rates it for 8, 6 and 4 ohm outputs. A 50-watt integrated or a mid-range receiver is a good match, and there is headroom up to 150 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize, Port and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 6.5 inches wide, 12.8 tall and 10.2 deep including the feet, and weighs 12.2 pounds. The rear X-Port uses closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet to cancel port resonance. The grilles are magnetic, and the Reserve series carries Polk's five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMichael Darroch reviewed the R100 for \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e on November 22, 2025, and found \"a seriously satisfying sound\": \"The R100 is a most enjoyable listen considering its price, with deep bass, richly textured mids, and clean highs.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHe called it \"one of the prettiest small speakers at its price point\" and cautioned: \"just make sure you stick with well-recorded music and\/or a decent front end,\" since it does not suffer fools gladly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want Legend-series drivers at the entry price\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same tweeter and cone design as Polk's flagship line, in the smallest Reserve cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Reserve home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the R100 matches the R350 center and R900 height modules, so every channel has the same voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a shelf or a small stand\u003c\/strong\u003e — 12.8 inches tall and 10.2 deep, with a rear port designed to cancel its own resonance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen at moderate levels in a small or medium room\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB sensitivity and a 5.25-inch woofer are sized for that\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want more bass and a bigger cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r200-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eReserve R200\u003c\/a\u003e adds a 6.5-inch woofer and reaches 39 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the binding posts on each speaker, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing to plug into the wall. Polk recommends 30 to 150 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands or a shelf with the tweeter near ear height. StereoNET found the bass fills out when the speakers sit closer to the wall behind them, and suggested a small 8-inch subwoofer for listeners who want more weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most R100 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r350-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R350 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same drivers, for a matched front three\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r900-height-module\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R900 height module\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sits on top of a Reserve speaker for Dolby Atmos height channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the octave below 58 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — to put the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the R100 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with magnetic grilles. Black, white and brown are available. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much power do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk recommends 30 to 150 watts per channel. Because the impedance dips to 3.6 ohms, choose an amplifier or receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. Polk quotes 44 Hz overall and 58 Hz at minus 3 dB. For film or deep electronic bass, a subwoofer fills in the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the X-Port?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear port with closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet's internal resonance. Polk says it keeps the bass output of a port while cancelling the resonances a plain port adds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the R100 different from the R200?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe R200 has a 6.5-inch woofer, reaches 39 Hz overall, handles 200 watts and weighs 19.1 pounds each. The R100 is 1.3 inches shorter and 7 pounds lighter, for smaller rooms and shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them as surround speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Polk designed the Reserve series to mix and match. The R100 is the natural surround or rear channel in a system built on the larger Reserve speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteve Guttenberg, the Audiophiliac, on the Reserve R100 and R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/jrawCTdtmp8\" title=\"POLK Reserve R100 \u0026amp; R200 speakers, game changers - Steve Guttenberg Audiophiliac\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003echeapaudioman reviews the Reserve R100:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PIXxqEHf5iU\" title=\"Polk Reserve R100 Review - Now We're Talking, Polk... - cheapaudioman\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Polk Audio","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45981186687149,"sku":"NEW-POR100-WHT","price":699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/POR100_WHT_01-Large__60161.1731268561.1280.1280_b91b28f8-645b-48c2-83c2-7869a7203658.jpg?v=1778134433"},{"product_id":"polk-audio-reserve-r100-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair","title":"Polk Audio Reserve R100 Bookshelf Speakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePolk's Legend-Series Drivers in a 13-Inch Cabinet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Reserve R100 is the smaller of Polk Audio's two Reserve bookshelf speakers. It uses the same 1-inch Pinnacle ring radiator tweeter and Turbine Cone woofer design as Polk's flagship Legend series, in a cabinet under 13 inches tall. The speakers are sold as a pair in black, white or brown.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk launched the Reserve series in 2021 as the step below Legend. Every Reserve model shares the same tweeter and cone design. A pair of R100s can start a stereo system now and become the surround channels of a Reserve home theater later, with the same voice front to back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Drivers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tweeter has a pointed center plug and a waveguide that Polk says widens the sweet spot and controls dispersion. The 5.25-inch woofer uses a molded foam-core cone with a turbine pattern, for stiffness without added weight. The two drivers cross over at 2,700 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk quotes an overall response of 44 Hz to 50 kHz, with the minus 3 dB limits at 58 Hz and 39 kHz. Sensitivity is 86 dB at 2.83 volts. The minimum impedance is 3.6 ohms, and the recommended amplifier power is 30 to 150 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat impedance dip is why the R100 wants an amplifier or receiver that is comfortable with 4-ohm speakers. Polk rates it for 8, 6 and 4 ohm outputs. A 50-watt integrated or a mid-range receiver is a good match, and there is headroom up to 150 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize, Port and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 6.5 inches wide, 12.8 tall and 10.2 deep including the feet, and weighs 12.2 pounds. The rear X-Port uses closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet to cancel port resonance. The grilles are magnetic, and the Reserve series carries Polk's five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMichael Darroch reviewed the R100 for \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e on November 22, 2025, and found \"a seriously satisfying sound\": \"The R100 is a most enjoyable listen considering its price, with deep bass, richly textured mids, and clean highs.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHe called it \"one of the prettiest small speakers at its price point\" and cautioned: \"just make sure you stick with well-recorded music and\/or a decent front end,\" since it does not suffer fools gladly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want Legend-series drivers at the entry price\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same tweeter and cone design as Polk's flagship line, in the smallest Reserve cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Reserve home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the R100 matches the R350 center and R900 height modules, so every channel has the same voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a shelf or a small stand\u003c\/strong\u003e — 12.8 inches tall and 10.2 deep, with a rear port designed to cancel its own resonance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen at moderate levels in a small or medium room\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB sensitivity and a 5.25-inch woofer are sized for that\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want more bass and a bigger cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r200-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eReserve R200\u003c\/a\u003e adds a 6.5-inch woofer and reaches 39 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the binding posts on each speaker, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing to plug into the wall. Polk recommends 30 to 150 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands or a shelf with the tweeter near ear height. StereoNET found the bass fills out when the speakers sit closer to the wall behind them, and suggested a small 8-inch subwoofer for listeners who want more weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most R100 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r350-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R350 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same drivers, for a matched front three\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r900-height-module\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R900 height module\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sits on top of a Reserve speaker for Dolby Atmos height channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the octave below 58 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — to put the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the R100 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with magnetic grilles. Black, white and brown are available. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much power do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk recommends 30 to 150 watts per channel. Because the impedance dips to 3.6 ohms, choose an amplifier or receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. Polk quotes 44 Hz overall and 58 Hz at minus 3 dB. For film or deep electronic bass, a subwoofer fills in the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the X-Port?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear port with closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet's internal resonance. Polk says it keeps the bass output of a port while cancelling the resonances a plain port adds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the R100 different from the R200?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe R200 has a 6.5-inch woofer, reaches 39 Hz overall, handles 200 watts and weighs 19.1 pounds each. The R100 is 1.3 inches shorter and 7 pounds lighter, for smaller rooms and shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them as surround speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Polk designed the Reserve series to mix and match. The R100 is the natural surround or rear channel in a system built on the larger Reserve speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteve Guttenberg, the Audiophiliac, on the Reserve R100 and R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/jrawCTdtmp8\" title=\"POLK Reserve R100 \u0026amp; R200 speakers, game changers - Steve Guttenberg Audiophiliac\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003echeapaudioman reviews the Reserve R100:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PIXxqEHf5iU\" title=\"Polk Reserve R100 Review - Now We're Talking, Polk... - cheapaudioman\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Polk Audio","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45981197664429,"sku":"NEW-POR100-BLK","price":699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/POR100_BLK_01-Large__37418.1731268240.1280.1280_ea2f9ebf-5ab4-461e-b5ad-580cf0f49d91.jpg?v=1778134420"},{"product_id":"elac-uni-fi-reference-ubr62-bookshelf-speakers-oak-pair","title":"ELAC Uni-Fi Reference UBR62 Bookshelf Speakers - Oak - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Three-Way Concentric Standmount, Not a Two-Way\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Uni-Fi Reference UBR62 is unusual for a bookshelf speaker: it is a true three-way. A 1-inch soft dome tweeter sits at the center of a 4-inch aluminum midrange cone, and a 6.5-inch aluminum woofer handles the bass below 260 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Jones designed it as the top of ELAC's Uni-Fi line. Both the concentric driver and the woofer use new cast chassis, the woofer cone is a single piece of compound-curvature aluminum, and the cabinet carries full perimeter bracing and dual-flared slot ports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Concentric Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePutting the tweeter at the apex of the midrange means the two drivers radiate from the same point. The sound stays consistent as you move off axis, so the sweet spot is wide and the room has less influence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC quotes 41 Hz to 35 kHz, 85 dB sensitivity at 2.83 volts and a 6 ohm nominal impedance, with a maximum input of 140 watts. Crossovers sit at 260 Hz and 1,800 Hz. At 85 dB, these want a capable amplifier; think 60 watts or more with real current.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8.2 inches wide, 14.1 tall and 13.2 deep, and weighs 23.5 pounds. That depth and weight make them stand speakers, not shelf speakers. Bi-wire 5-way binding posts are fitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRon Nagle reviewed the UBR62 for \u003cem\u003eEnjoy the Music\u003c\/em\u003e in September 2021, summing it up as \"One of the best price versus performance monitor loudspeakers.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the character: \"The sound is clean and clear with a midrange similar to a reel-to-reel tape recording.\" His close: \"What Andrew Jones has designed is an affordable and excellent way to bring music into your life, highly recommended.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want three-way coherence in a standmount\u003c\/strong\u003e — a dedicated midrange driver keeps voices clear when the bass gets busy, which two-ways cannot fully manage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour listening seat moves around\u003c\/strong\u003e — the concentric driver keeps the balance even off axis, so a sofa full of people all hear the same speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own a good amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 85 dB into 6 ohms rewards a solid \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e and will show up a weak one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want reach without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — 41 Hz from a 6.5-inch woofer covers nearly all music, and Nagle heard useful output lower still in his room\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a compact speaker or an easy load\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is the wrong ELAC; at 13 inches deep, 23.5 pounds and 85 dB it wants stands, space and power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the bi-wire binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. Leave the jumpers in place for a single run. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNagle used 24-inch stands, which ELAC recommends. Give the cabinets room behind them, toe them in slightly, and allow a few weeks of playing before judging the bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most UBR62 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 60 to 140 watts into 6 ohms, with the current to back it up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/elac-ls-80-speaker-stands-23-inch-gray-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eELAC LS-80 speaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — ELAC's own 23-inch stands, built for a 23 pound cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/music-streamers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMusic streamers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean source for a revealing speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a sensible gauge for a 6 ohm load, or two runs for bi-wiring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the UBR62 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, with grilles in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSensitivity is 85 dB into 6 ohms and maximum input is 140 watts. We suggest 60 watts or more from an amplifier rated into 4 ohms. A small receiver will play them but will not show what they can do.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire or bi-amp them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The UBR62 has bi-wire 5-way binding posts. For a normal single run, leave the supplied jumpers in place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The UBR62 reaches 41 Hz, below the lowest note on a bass guitar. For film soundtracks a subwoofer adds the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSatin white baffle with oak sides, or satin black baffle with walnut sides. They are listed here as Oak and Walnut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is different from the Uni-Fi 2.0?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Reference version adds cast chassis to both drivers, a new woofer and concentric driver, more bracing, a revised crossover and the two-tone finishes. Sensitivity and impedance are similar, so the same amplifiers apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteve Guttenberg, the Audiophiliac, reviews the Uni-Fi Reference:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/24ijgKemSPM\" title=\"ELAC UNI-FI REFERENCE, Sweet Success! - Steve Guttenberg Audiophiliac\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures the UBR62:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/FEPZ4nYAdY4\" title=\"ELAC Uni-Fi Reference UBR62 Bookshelf Speaker Review - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"ELAC","offers":[{"title":"Oak \/ New","offer_id":45981207101613,"sku":"NEW-ELRUBR62-OAK-PR","price":1299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/ELRUBR62_OAK_01-Large__17732.1731085380.1280.1280_690654a9-69ac-4fdb-b4c4-9b2d9214df8b.jpg?v=1778131181"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-xt-b100-bookshelf-speaker-gloss-black-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion XT B100 Bookshelf Speaker - Gloss Black - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMartinLogan's Biggest Folded Motion Tweeter, in a Box You Can Shelve\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion XT B100 is the top bookshelf speaker in MartinLogan's Motion range. It pairs the Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion XT tweeter with a 6.5-inch Nomex-reinforced Kevlar woofer in a rear-ported cabinet. It is 14.5 inches tall and sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan is best known for electrostatic panels. The Folded Motion tweeter brings some of that character to a conventional box. A pleated film diaphragm squeezes air between its folds, so it barely has to move. The XT version has 12.4 square inches of surface, 40 percent more than the standard tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Folded Diaphragm Sounds Different\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA dome tweeter pushes air with a small cup. The folded film moves far less for the same output, which lowers distortion and keeps the treble clean at high volume. A molded waveguide, chosen from nearly 50 profiles, matches its dispersion to the woofer at the 2,600 Hz crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 45 Hz to 25 kHz within 3 dB and 93 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 4 ohms. Recommended power is 20 to 250 watts. Dispersion is 90 degrees horizontal and 45 degrees vertical, so tweeter height matters more than with most speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8 inches wide, 14.5 tall and 12.5 deep with feet, and weighs 20.5 pounds. Finishes are gloss black, walnut and satin white. The 5-way binding posts are doubled for bi-wiring or bi-amping. A threaded insert in the base bolts to the STAND25 stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMark Gusew reviewed the XT B100 for \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e on July 19, 2023: \"From the moment I started my listening sessions, I was impressed by how balanced a musical communicator this little loudspeaker is.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNasim Abbu-Daggar reviewed it for \u003cem\u003eFuture Audiophile\u003c\/em\u003e on October 9, 2024: \"The Folded Motion tweeter excelled in bringing an incredible amount of detail and sparkle to the upper registers.\" Bass was \"tight and controlled.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis caution: a \"relatively narrow horizontal sweet spot.\" Off to the side the sound thins, so the XT B100 rewards a well-placed seat more than a scattered crowd.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the MartinLogan sound without panels\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest Folded Motion tweeter MartinLogan makes, in a cabinet that sits on a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to detail\u003c\/strong\u003e — strings, cymbals and voices are where both reviewers heard the XT B100 pull ahead\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Motion home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-mp10-multi-purpose-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion MP10\u003c\/a\u003e surrounds share the tweeter, so the system speaks with one voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier can drive 4 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e — 93 dB sensitivity means little power is needed, but the load is 4 ohms, so check your amplifier's rating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a wide sweet spot for a crowd\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 45 degree vertical dispersion and focused imaging favor a seated listener; for wide seating, consider the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e with its 90 by 90 degree pattern\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. For a single run, leave the jumpers between the two pairs of posts in place. Remove them to bi-wire or bi-amp. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, a foot or more from the wall behind the rear port. Toe them in toward the seat. Future Audiophile placed them about two and a half feet from the back wall and toed in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most XT B100 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — bolts to the base and puts the tweeter at ear height, with color-matched trim\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center for a Motion XT home theater\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-10-powered-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan Dynamo 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for the octave below 45 Hz on film and bass-heavy music\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 4 ohm rated amplifier of 50 watts or more is plenty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Motion range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround or height channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 20 to 250 watts. At 93 dB sensitivity it plays loud on modest power, but the 4 ohm impedance means the amplifier should be rated for 4 ohm loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire or bi-amp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The XT B100 has two pairs of 5-way binding posts with jumpers. It is the only Motion bookshelf model with this option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the XT B100 and the Motion B10?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe XT B100 has the larger XT tweeter, a 6.5-inch Kevlar woofer and deeper bass, 45 Hz against 56 Hz. It is also two inches taller and 6 pounds heavier. The B10 has a wider vertical dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. The XT B100 reaches 45 Hz. For film, or if you want the lowest octave with real weight, add a subwoofer and cross over around 60 to 80 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it come with a grille?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA clip-on cover for the woofer is supplied. The tweeter sits in its waveguide and stays exposed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Motion XT B100:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/mJiqHCn2SV0\" title=\"Greatness for LESS - Martin Logan Motion XT B100 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the XT B100 and B10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/XXTBJbb3naU\" title=\"Martin Logan XT B100 and B10 Review (LIVE) - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Gloss Black \/ New","offer_id":45981211394221,"sku":"NEW-MLXTB100-GLSBLK","price":679.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLXTB100_GLSBLK_01-Large__15220.1731171253.1280.1280_aad53769-d4b2-4b64-8add-e0d5645681ca.jpg?v=1778134821"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-xt-b100-bookshelf-speaker-satin-white-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion XT B100 Bookshelf Speaker - Satin White - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMartinLogan's Biggest Folded Motion Tweeter, in a Box You Can Shelve\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion XT B100 is the top bookshelf speaker in MartinLogan's Motion range. It pairs the Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion XT tweeter with a 6.5-inch Nomex-reinforced Kevlar woofer in a rear-ported cabinet. It is 14.5 inches tall and sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan is best known for electrostatic panels. The Folded Motion tweeter brings some of that character to a conventional box. A pleated film diaphragm squeezes air between its folds, so it barely has to move. The XT version has 12.4 square inches of surface, 40 percent more than the standard tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Folded Diaphragm Sounds Different\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA dome tweeter pushes air with a small cup. The folded film moves far less for the same output, which lowers distortion and keeps the treble clean at high volume. A molded waveguide, chosen from nearly 50 profiles, matches its dispersion to the woofer at the 2,600 Hz crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 45 Hz to 25 kHz within 3 dB and 93 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 4 ohms. Recommended power is 20 to 250 watts. Dispersion is 90 degrees horizontal and 45 degrees vertical, so tweeter height matters more than with most speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8 inches wide, 14.5 tall and 12.5 deep with feet, and weighs 20.5 pounds. Finishes are gloss black, walnut and satin white. The 5-way binding posts are doubled for bi-wiring or bi-amping. A threaded insert in the base bolts to the STAND25 stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMark Gusew reviewed the XT B100 for \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e on July 19, 2023: \"From the moment I started my listening sessions, I was impressed by how balanced a musical communicator this little loudspeaker is.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNasim Abbu-Daggar reviewed it for \u003cem\u003eFuture Audiophile\u003c\/em\u003e on October 9, 2024: \"The Folded Motion tweeter excelled in bringing an incredible amount of detail and sparkle to the upper registers.\" Bass was \"tight and controlled.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis caution: a \"relatively narrow horizontal sweet spot.\" Off to the side the sound thins, so the XT B100 rewards a well-placed seat more than a scattered crowd.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the MartinLogan sound without panels\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest Folded Motion tweeter MartinLogan makes, in a cabinet that sits on a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to detail\u003c\/strong\u003e — strings, cymbals and voices are where both reviewers heard the XT B100 pull ahead\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Motion home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-mp10-multi-purpose-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion MP10\u003c\/a\u003e surrounds share the tweeter, so the system speaks with one voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier can drive 4 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e — 93 dB sensitivity means little power is needed, but the load is 4 ohms, so check your amplifier's rating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a wide sweet spot for a crowd\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 45 degree vertical dispersion and focused imaging favor a seated listener; for wide seating, consider the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e with its 90 by 90 degree pattern\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. For a single run, leave the jumpers between the two pairs of posts in place. Remove them to bi-wire or bi-amp. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, a foot or more from the wall behind the rear port. Toe them in toward the seat. Future Audiophile placed them about two and a half feet from the back wall and toed in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most XT B100 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — bolts to the base and puts the tweeter at ear height, with color-matched trim\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center for a Motion XT home theater\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-10-powered-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan Dynamo 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for the octave below 45 Hz on film and bass-heavy music\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 4 ohm rated amplifier of 50 watts or more is plenty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Motion range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround or height channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 20 to 250 watts. At 93 dB sensitivity it plays loud on modest power, but the 4 ohm impedance means the amplifier should be rated for 4 ohm loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire or bi-amp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The XT B100 has two pairs of 5-way binding posts with jumpers. It is the only Motion bookshelf model with this option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the XT B100 and the Motion B10?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe XT B100 has the larger XT tweeter, a 6.5-inch Kevlar woofer and deeper bass, 45 Hz against 56 Hz. It is also two inches taller and 6 pounds heavier. The B10 has a wider vertical dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. The XT B100 reaches 45 Hz. For film, or if you want the lowest octave with real weight, add a subwoofer and cross over around 60 to 80 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it come with a grille?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA clip-on cover for the woofer is supplied. The tweeter sits in its waveguide and stays exposed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Motion XT B100:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/mJiqHCn2SV0\" title=\"Greatness for LESS - Martin Logan Motion XT B100 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the XT B100 and B10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/XXTBJbb3naU\" title=\"Martin Logan XT B100 and B10 Review (LIVE) - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Satin White \/ New","offer_id":45981464821933,"sku":"NEW-MLXTB100-SATWHT","price":679.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLXTB100_SATWHT_01-Large__32280.1731171487.1280.1280_944195a1-e2e4-43ec-8407-2648a06ac2c3.jpg?v=1778130914"},{"product_id":"mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-10-master-edition-loudspeakers-black-pair","title":"MoFi Electronics SourcePoint 10 Master Edition Loudspeakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA 10-Inch Concentric Standmount, Refined\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe SourcePoint 10 Master Edition is Andrew Jones's flagship standmount for MoFi Electronics. A 10-inch paper-pulp woofer carries a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter at its center, in a 22.5-inch cabinet. The Master Edition adds an upgraded crossover with a tweeter level switch. The speakers are sold as a pair, without stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJones chose a woofer with nearly two and a half times the area of a typical 6.5-inch driver. It barely has to move to make bass, which keeps the midrange clean. It also lets the crossover sit low, at 1.6 kHz. The cone doubles as a waveguide for the tweeter, so both drivers share one dispersion pattern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat the Master Edition Changes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe new crossover uses polypropylene film capacitors, metalized-film resistors and air-core inductors. A three-position tweeter switch offers high, mid and low settings for damped, normal and bright rooms. MoFi sells the same crossover as an owner-installable kit for the original SourcePoint 10.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi quotes 42 Hz to 30 kHz, 91 dB sensitivity and 8 ohms nominal with a 6.2 ohm minimum. The minimum recommended power is 30 watts. The maximum input is 200 watts. Stereophile confirmed the 91 dB figure on the original version and found it an easy load, so small tube amplifiers work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 14.5 inches wide, 22.5 tall and 16 deep without the grille, and weighs 46.2 pounds. The walls are 1-inch MDF and the faceted baffle is 2 inches thick. Finishes are satin walnut with gray grilles or satin black ash with black grilles. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the SourcePoint 10 in Class B of its Recommended Components, 2024 through 2026. The entry cites John Atkinson's \"clean, superbly well-defined low frequencies, the natural-sounding midrange\" and Ken Micallef calling it \"a contender for Loudspeaker of the Year.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDick Olsher of \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e gave the SourcePoint 10 a 2024 Golden Ear Award: \"Expect a massive sweet spot and a superlative boogie factor.\" It reminded him of the single full-range driver speakers he has enjoyed in the past.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eHi-Fi Pig\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the Master Edition on September 19, 2025: \"The sound is very even and balanced, but without sounding flat or sterile at all.\" The reviewer praised the treble switch and the included port bungs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a floorstander's scale without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 10-inch driver, 42 Hz bass and a huge sweet spot from a standmount\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a low-power tube amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 91 dB sensitivity and an easy 8 ohm load mean 30 watts is plenty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is bright or heavily damped\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tweeter switch lets you match the balance to the room without equipment changes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own SourcePoint 10s\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Master Edition crossover is sold as an upgrade kit, so you can reach this specification without new cabinets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room or stands are small\u003c\/strong\u003e — at 46 pounds and 22.5 inches tall, this needs a sturdy stand and space; the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-8-loudspeakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSourcePoint 8\u003c\/a\u003e gives the same design in a smaller box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. Set the tweeter switch to mid first, then adjust to taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on sturdy stands about two feet from the rear and side walls, as MoFi recommends. Foam bungs are included for the ports if they must sit closer. Hi-Fi Pig found taller stands gave a better stereo image than low ones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most SourcePoint 10 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-sourcepoint-10-lss-low-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi SourcePoint 10 LSS low stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — MoFi's own low stands for the 10; conventional 20 to 24 inch stands rated for 50 pounds also work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a quality single run for each speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-ultradeck\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi UltraDeck turntable\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-studiophono-mm-mc-phono-preamplifier\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi StudioPhono phono preamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a matching MoFi analog front end\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 200 watts, any topology\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the SourcePoint 10 Master Edition sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with magnetic grilles. Stands are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the tweeter switch do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt raises or lowers the tweeter level in three steps. High suits heavily damped rooms, mid is the factory balance, and low tames bright, reflective rooms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi recommends at least 30 watts and rates the speaker for 200 watts maximum. At 91 dB and 8 ohms, a small tube amplifier will play them loud.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The SourcePoint 10 reaches 42 Hz and Stereophile praised its well-defined low frequencies. For film, a subwoofer adds the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eI own the original SourcePoint 10. Should I upgrade?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi sells the Master Edition crossover as a user-installable kit that adds the tweeter switch and the upgraded components. Call us for availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 10 different from the SourcePoint 8?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 10 has a 10-inch driver, reaches 42 Hz, is 4 dB more sensitive and has the tweeter switch. The 8 is two-thirds the size, lighter and reaches 47 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner on the SourcePoint 10 Master Edition:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/3YqGBDutoB8\" title=\"Time for a Switch?! MoFi SourcePoint 10 Master Edition Is Here! - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteve Guttenberg's review of the original SourcePoint 10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/gNKrgNTDeck\" title=\"FIRST Review: MoFi SourcePoint 10 - Steve Guttenberg Audiophiliac\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MoFi Electronics","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45981471932589,"sku":"NEW-MOSP10ME-BLK","price":3495.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MOSP10_BLK_01-Large__45588.1774274119.1280.1280_47b8709d-229a-4d49-b36a-ea335c2fbc83.jpg?v=1778135770"},{"product_id":"mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-8-loudspeakers-white-with-stands-pair","title":"MoFi Electronics SourcePoint 8 Loudspeakers - White with Stands - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAndrew Jones's Point-Source Speaker, in a Size for Real Rooms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe SourcePoint 8 is the smaller of Andrew Jones's two concentric standmounts for MoFi Electronics. An 8-inch woofer carries a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter at its center, so both drivers launch sound from one point. The cabinet is 18 inches tall, and the speakers are sold as a pair, with or without MoFi's matching stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJones designed concentric drivers at KEF, Pioneer, TAD and ELAC before MoFi. His idea here is a two-way with a woofer large enough to reach the bass. The tweeter never has to strain, and the crossover can sit low, at 1.6 kHz. The woofer cone doubles as a waveguide for the tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy One Point Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhen treble and midrange come from the same spot, the sound stays the same as you move around the room. The stereo image holds together. MoFi's Twin-Drive motor uses two neodymium magnets for a symmetrical field, which the company says cuts intermodulation distortion. A faceted baffle reduces diffraction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi quotes 47 Hz to 30 kHz, 87 dB sensitivity and 8 ohms nominal with a 6.4 ohm minimum. The minimum recommended power is 30 watts. The maximum input is 150 watts. Stereophile measured the sensitivity as specified and called it an easy load, so tube amplifiers are a real option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.4 inches wide, 18 tall and 12.6 deep without the grille, and weighs 27.9 pounds. Finishes are satin walnut or satin black ash real-wood veneer, or painted satin white. Magnetic grilles are included, and a single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. The warranty is five years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the SourcePoint 8 in Class B of its Recommended Components, 2025 and 2026 editions. The entry cites Kalman Rubinson's review: \"they generate a fairly wide and deep soundstage that is notably transparent and detailed.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNeil Gader of \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e gave it a 2024 Golden Ear Award: \"Bass response is forceful, controlled, and accurate in pitch.\" He added: \"I called it the most satisfying compact I'd heard all year. I still do.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDave Berriman reviewed it for \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e on February 13, 2024, finding \"an uncanny ability to set up precise stereo images within an almost holographic soundstage.\" Stereophile noted little output below 50 Hz, but \"tight, powerful bass\" above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want pinpoint imaging and a wide sweet spot\u003c\/strong\u003e — the concentric driver is why three reviewers led with the soundstage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a tube amplifier or a modest integrated\u003c\/strong\u003e — 87 dB, 8 ohms and a 6.4 ohm minimum make an easy load; 30 watts is enough\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a big-speaker sound in a medium room\u003c\/strong\u003e — an 8-inch woofer and an 18-inch cabinet give scale that 5-inch two-ways cannot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want it to look like furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — book-matched veneer, a faceted baffle and magnetic grilles in three finishes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the deepest bass and highest efficiency\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-10-master-edition-loudspeakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSourcePoint 10 Master Edition\u003c\/a\u003e adds a 10-inch driver, 42 Hz extension and 91 dB sensitivity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. Any integrated or tube amplifier of 30 watts or more will drive them well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the driver near ear height, a foot or more from the wall behind the rear port. Stereophile found the clearest center image with the speakers toed in about halfway between straight ahead and aimed at the seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most SourcePoint 8 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-sourcepoint-8-speaker-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi SourcePoint 8 stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sized to the cabinet footprint, or choose the with-stands version of this listing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the easy load and 87 dB sensitivity suit low-power tube designs as well as solid state\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-ultradeck\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi UltraDeck turntable\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-studiophono-mm-mc-phono-preamplifier\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi StudioPhono phono preamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a matching MoFi analog front end\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the octave below 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the SourcePoint 8 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with grilles. Choose the version with stands if you want MoFi's matching stands in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi recommends at least 30 watts and rates the speaker for 150 watts maximum. Stereophile called it an easy load, so tube amplifiers and small integrateds are fine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a concentric driver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA tweeter mounted at the center of the woofer. Both drivers radiate from the same point. The sound stays consistent off axis and the stereo image is precise. Andrew Jones has built speakers this way for decades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. MoFi quotes 47 Hz and Stereophile heard tight, powerful bass above 50 Hz. For film or deep electronic bass, a subwoofer completes it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 8 different from the SourcePoint 10 Master Edition?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 10 has a 10-inch driver, reaches 42 Hz, is 4 dB more sensitive and weighs 46 pounds each. The 8 is two-thirds the size and fits rooms and stands the 10 cannot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSatin walnut or satin black ash real-wood veneer, or painted satin white. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the SourcePoint 8:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/3DQERxkB92k\" title=\"Is this REALLY an ANDREW JONES Speaker? SourcePoint 8 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the SourcePoint 8:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/h90tqdGsgP4\" title=\"Why Do People Love the MoFi SourcePoint 8? - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MoFi Electronics","offers":[{"title":"White with Stands \/ New","offer_id":45981499195565,"sku":"NEW-MOSP8-WHTSTA","price":2594.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/sourcepoint-8-white-facing-right-corrected.jpg?v=1785703666"},{"product_id":"elac-debut-connex-dcb41-powered-bookshelf-speakers-blue-pair","title":"ELAC Debut ConneX DCB41 Powered Bookshelf Speakers - Blue - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Complete ELAC System for a Desk or a Small Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Debut ConneX DCB41 is ELAC's compact powered speaker system. The active cabinet holds two 50-watt Class D amplifiers, a phono preamp, a USB DAC, HDMI ARC, optical and aptX Bluetooth, and the passive cabinet connects with speaker cable. Each carries a 0.75-inch soft dome tweeter and a 4.5-inch polypropylene woofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC's Debut line is its entry range. The ConneX adds the electronics, so a TV, a turntable and a computer all plug straight into the speakers. What Hi-Fi? gave it five stars in December 2022 and named it a 2024 Awards winner two years later. Audio Advisor stocks it in walnut, orange, blue and black.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Is Built In\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHDMI ARC carries TV sound and lets the TV remote control the volume. USB takes a computer at up to 24-bit and 96 kHz. The phono input is switchable to line level, with a ground screw for the turntable. ELAC's XBass Enhancer adds low-end weight and can be switched off, and an infrared remote is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC quotes 66 Hz to 25 kHz anechoic and 50 Hz to 25 kHz in a room, with distortion at or below 0.2 percent. Each cabinet measures 5.5 inches wide, 9.6 tall and 8 deep. The active speaker weighs 7.6 pounds and the passive one 6.3, and the rear port is folded into an S shape to cut port noise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThose are desk and small-room numbers, and the reviewers treated them that way. SoundStage! Simplifi used the DCB41 for desktop audio in a home office and in a basement family room, and What Hi-Fi? called the system neat and compact. A subwoofer output is there for the bass a 4.5-inch woofer cannot reach.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePower and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe internal supply runs on 120 to 240 volts, so there is no external brick. Finishes on the store are walnut, orange, blue and black. Firmware updates load over USB. The active and passive speakers must be a pair, because the amplifiers for both live in one cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e gave the DCB41 five stars on December 14, 2022, and named it an Awards 2024 winner: \"Nothing jars or distracts from the music being played.\" The verdict: \"it earns a rich recommendation from us.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEd Selley of \u003cem\u003eAVForums\u003c\/em\u003e gave it a Best in Class award, August 29, 2023: \"This is a piece of equipment that does what great hifi should do; make you stop concentrating on the box and listen to the tune itself.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat Hi-Fi? did flag the phono input: \"This phono stage is fine for occasional use.\" If vinyl is your main source, switch that input to line level and add an external phono preamp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Powered Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want one system on a desk or in a small room\u003c\/strong\u003e — amplifiers, DAC and phono stage are inside, so two speakers and a source are the whole setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want TV sound without a soundbar\u003c\/strong\u003e — HDMI ARC carries the TV and the TV remote runs the volume\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a turntable and play it occasionally\u003c\/strong\u003e — the phono input takes a moving-magnet deck directly, and switches to line level if you add a better preamp later\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou stream from a phone\u003c\/strong\u003e — aptX Bluetooth pairs without an app or a network\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want Wi-Fi streaming\u003c\/strong\u003e — the DCB41 has none; add a \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/music-streamers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003enetwork streamer\u003c\/a\u003e to the optical or line input, or step up to a speaker with streaming inside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe active speaker plugs into the wall and connects to the passive speaker with speaker cable. The TV goes to HDMI ARC, a turntable to the phono RCA input with its ground wire on the screw, a computer to USB and a disc player or streamer to optical. Pair a phone over Bluetooth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the speakers with the tweeters near ear height and leave a few inches behind the rear port. Try XBass on and off and keep whichever suits the room. A subwoofer connects to the RCA output. Then pick a source and press play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most DCB41 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the switchable phono input takes a moving-magnet deck directly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/elac-ds103-10-inch-powered-subwoofer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eELAC DS103 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — ELAC's 10-inch sub for the bass below 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — to put the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/hdmi-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHDMI cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — one run from the TV's ARC port\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need an amplifier or receiver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEverything is built in. The active speaker holds two 50-watt amplifiers, the DAC and the phono preamp, and powers the passive speaker through speaker cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I connect a turntable directly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Switch the RCA input to phono and connect a moving-magnet turntable, with its ground wire on the screw. What Hi-Fi? found the phono stage fine for occasional use, so serious vinyl listeners may prefer an external preamp on the line setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my TV remote control the volume?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, over HDMI ARC with CEC. The DCB41 also comes with its own infrared remote.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo they stream over Wi-Fi?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStreaming is by aptX Bluetooth from a phone, tablet or computer. There is no network streaming built in, so add a streamer to the optical or line input if you want an app-driven system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot at a desk or in a small room. ELAC quotes 50 Hz in a room, and the XBass Enhancer adds weight. For film or a larger room, the RCA subwoofer output takes any powered sub.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is XBass Enhancer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC's bass processing, which extends and boosts the low end of the 4.5-inch woofer. AVForums found it well judged rather than heavy-handed, and you can switch it off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJoe N Tell reviews the Debut ConneX DCB41:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/pAR4oXI9bH4\" title=\"FINALLY! A More Affordable Speaker with HDMI ARC! ELAC ConneX DCB41 Review - Joe N Tell\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEalan Osborne reviews the Debut ConneX:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/xw_S3eVVnaA\" title=\"ELAC Debut ConneX Review - Powered Bookshelf Speakers with HDMI ARC - Ealan Osborne\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about powered speakers, connecting a TV or turntable, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"ELAC","offers":[{"title":"Blue \/ New","offer_id":45981505290413,"sku":"NEW-ELCONNEX-BLU","price":524.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/ELCONNEX_BLU_01-Large__69562.1731058629.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778114096"},{"product_id":"dynaudio-emit-10-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair","title":"Dynaudio Emit 10 Bookshelf Speakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003ch3\u003eFive Stars - \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e Magazine\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\"Versatility, Transparency, Energy, Precision, Scale and Volume\"\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe most compact member of Dynaudio's Emit speaker series is ideal for small to medium-sized rooms or anywhere where space is limited, such as on a bookshelf or small stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eDon't go assuming that a compact speaker has small-scale sound. The 10's 5.5\" MSP mid\/bass driver and 1.1\" soft-dome tweeter team up with a first-order crossover and a forgiving linear 6 ohm impedance that lets them play nicely with pretty much any amp you plug them into. The tuned bass-reflex port and long-throw driver are optimized for smaller and mid-size rooms. Dynaudio's designers made sure that the Emit 10 still work shoved up against a wall or on a shelf, because they know not everyone has (or wants) a dedicated listening room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e\"A Wall-To-Wall Soundstage with Great Depth\"\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eWhen put to the test against its competition in 2016, the British magazine \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e awarded the 10 with no less than a five-star rating and Test Winner honors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\"Versatility, transparency, energy, precision, scale and volume: you name it and the Emit 10s deliver in spades,\" raves \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e magazine, July 2016. \"These are terrific all-rounders, and offer the sort of performance that we might expect from something much higher up the food chain.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eIn his July 8, 2016 review for \u003cem\u003eCNET.com\u003c\/em\u003e, Steve Guttenberg reports, \"The Emit 10s unfurled a wall-to-wall soundstage with great depth as I played Brian Eno's new album, \u003cem\u003eThe Ship.\u003c\/em\u003e The first track is a rambling, ambient trip, with a churning low bass foundation that I could hardly believe was coming from speakers as small as these. I was so totally sucked into Eno's slow-motion vortex of sound and texture that I forgot that I was listening to the Emit 10s; I was lost in the music.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDyanuadio's Emit Series\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eWho would've thought that 'entry-level' could be this good? Emit might be the introductory end of Dynaudio's range, but the company made zero compromises when it comes to sound quality. Dynaudio went above and beyond to make sure that every speaker in the Emit range can be easily paired with different amplifiers and AV receivers. They are designed to be easy to position in your room, and they can all be used as part of a stereo or surround-sound system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eMake no mistake! Dynaudio poured just as much enthusiasm, knowhow, and innovation into its Emit range as it has into its ultra high-end Evidence loudspeakers. Dynaudio doesn't believe in cutting corners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTake a close look at a pair of Emit speakers and you'll find the same materials in their drivers as you'll find on every other model in Dynaudio's range. You get the same Magnesium Silicate Polymer for the mid\/bass drivers (a material Dynaudio developed in-house in our Skanderborg factory), the same philosophy behind the precision-coated soft-dome tweeters, and the same lightweight aluminum voice-coils for greater precision, power-consistency and control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eAnd they've been designed, engineered and tuned by the same people who've produced some of the most cutting-edge, high-end loudspeakers of the past 40 years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNemo Audio Project reviews the Dynaudio Emit 10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/HM_oWxgcevY\" title=\"Dynaudio Emit 10 Review! They finally fixed it.\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the Dynaudio Emit 10 demonstrated alongside the Emit 20:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/geNoyy95IPQ\" title=\"Dynaudio Emit 10 and 20: Overview and Demo - First Step Into Hi-Fi.\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n","brand":"DYNAUDIO","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ Pair \/ New","offer_id":45981562273965,"sku":"NEW-DYEMIT10-BLK-PR","price":799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/DYEMIT10_BLK_01-Large__51071.1730967920.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778092688"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-gold-100-6g-bookshelf-speaker-high-gloss-black-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Gold 100 6G Bookshelf Speaker - High Gloss Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThree Drivers, a Ribbon-Style Tweeter, and a Stand-Mount Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 100 6G is a true three-way in a standmount cabinet. An 8-inch HDT C-CAM bass driver, a 3-inch HDT C-CAM midrange driver and an MPD III tweeter each take their own band, with crossovers at 700 Hz and 2.6 kHz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree-way standmounts are rare because they are hard to do well. Reviewers keep reaching for the same comparison here, and it is not to other bookshelf speakers. It is to small floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHDT, and Why the Cones Are Hexagons\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHDT stands for Hexagonal Diaphragm Technology, Monitor Audio’s newest metal cone. In its own words, the cone \"employs a hexagonal pattern to disrupt symmetries in the cone breakup\", which is a precise way of saying the cone stays a piston for longer before it starts to ring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes an in-room response of 32 Hz to 60 kHz at minus 6 dB, and 49 Hz to 60 kHz free-field. Sensitivity is 86.5 dB. Nominal impedance is 4 ohms, with a minimum of 3.9 ohms at 140 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat 4 ohm rating matters. The recommendation is 130 to 500 watts into 4 ohms, and peak output is quoted at 119 dB. The rear HiVe II port is tuned to 38 Hz. This speaker wants a serious amplifier, and rewards one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMPD III, the Tweeter That Is Not a Dome\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe high frequencies come from a Micro Pleated Diaphragm rather than a dome. Monitor Audio says the latest MPD III \"delivers precise high-frequency sound with greater consistency, clarity and accuracy\". It is the same family of tweeter the company uses further up its range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLee Dunkley gave them a Recommended badge in \u003cem\u003eAudiograde\u003c\/em\u003e on January 25, 2025: \"The bigger design pays off to deliver one of the most enjoyable and insightful sounds I’ve heard in a long time.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Schryer, in \u003cem\u003ePMA Magazine\u003c\/em\u003e on February 13, 2025: \"Not once during my audition of the British speakers did I think, ‘They need a subwoofer.’ The 100s sounded complete.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth flag the same practical point. Dunkley notes that \"despite the bookshelf categorisation, you’ll need to factor in the additional cost of a pair of dedicated speaker stands\". At nearly 31 pounds each, he is right.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want floorstander scale without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Australia\u003c\/em\u003e found they provide \"small floorstander levels of dynamic expression and low frequency depth coupled to a more compact form factor\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen for detail\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same review called them \"a lively, captivating loudspeaker capable of outstanding levels of detail and resolution\", which is what a dedicated midrange and a pleated tweeter are for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own a powerful amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 4 ohm nominal load with a 130 to 500 watt recommendation is not a job for a small integrated; one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e with real current, or a power amplifier, is the match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is mid-sized\u003c\/strong\u003e — Dunkley calls them \"easy to install speakers ideally suited to mid-sized rooms\", and 119 dB of headroom means they will not run out of room in one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBudget for stands\u003c\/strong\u003e — 17.6 inches tall and 30 pounds 14 ounces each puts these well past what a shelf should carry, so a dedicated pair of stands is part of the purchase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on the back of each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet them on stands rated for the weight, bring the tweeter to ear height, and give the rear port room to breathe. Then angle them in toward your seat. A 4 ohm speaker also deserves a cable of sensible gauge for the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Gold 100 6G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — not optional at nearly 31 pounds each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 to 500 watts into 4 ohms, with current to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a low-loss run sized for a 4 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional at 32 Hz, but there for film\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I really need a big amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Monitor Audio rates the speaker at 4 ohms nominal and recommends 130 to 500 watts into that load. The reviewers who praise it were driving it properly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRealistically, they will not. Each cabinet is 17.6 inches tall, 9.1 wide and 14.1 deep, and weighs 30 pounds 14 ounces. They belong on stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow low does the bass go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes 32 Hz in-room at minus 6 dB, with the port tuned to 38 Hz. One reviewer never once wished for a subwoofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is an MPD tweeter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA Micro Pleated Diaphragm: a folded, ribbon-like membrane rather than a dome. Monitor Audio’s third-generation version is here, and it is the same design family as its dearer ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are there?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMacassar wood veneer, High-Gloss Black and Satin White. Monitor Audio covers the speakers with a five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs there anything above this in the range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot among our bookshelf speakers. The Gold 100 6G is the top standmount we carry from Monitor Audio; beyond it, the Gold range moves to floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio introduces the Gold Series 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/eAFKdUtPCE0\" title=\"A Contemporary Classic: Gold Series 6G\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA British Audiophile spends fifteen minutes with a pair:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/YhvyhL69Ggw\" title=\"Monitor Audio Gold 100 6G Speaker Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about three-way speakers, matching an amplifier to a 4 ohm load, or choosing speaker stands? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45981608575149,"sku":"NEW-MRG6G100-BLK-PR","price":4599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRG6G100-BLK-PR_01_angle_2024__73650.1731255174.1280.1280_0bcb54af-6c65-4b00-a35d-62956a0e1d83.jpg?v=1778157639"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-gold-100-6g-bookshelf-speaker-satin-white-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Gold 100 6G Bookshelf Speaker - Satin White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThree Drivers, a Ribbon-Style Tweeter, and a Stand-Mount Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 100 6G is a true three-way in a standmount cabinet. An 8-inch HDT C-CAM bass driver, a 3-inch HDT C-CAM midrange driver and an MPD III tweeter each take their own band, with crossovers at 700 Hz and 2.6 kHz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree-way standmounts are rare because they are hard to do well. Reviewers keep reaching for the same comparison here, and it is not to other bookshelf speakers. It is to small floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHDT, and Why the Cones Are Hexagons\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHDT stands for Hexagonal Diaphragm Technology, Monitor Audio’s newest metal cone. In its own words, the cone \"employs a hexagonal pattern to disrupt symmetries in the cone breakup\", which is a precise way of saying the cone stays a piston for longer before it starts to ring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes an in-room response of 32 Hz to 60 kHz at minus 6 dB, and 49 Hz to 60 kHz free-field. Sensitivity is 86.5 dB. Nominal impedance is 4 ohms, with a minimum of 3.9 ohms at 140 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat 4 ohm rating matters. The recommendation is 130 to 500 watts into 4 ohms, and peak output is quoted at 119 dB. The rear HiVe II port is tuned to 38 Hz. This speaker wants a serious amplifier, and rewards one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMPD III, the Tweeter That Is Not a Dome\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe high frequencies come from a Micro Pleated Diaphragm rather than a dome. Monitor Audio says the latest MPD III \"delivers precise high-frequency sound with greater consistency, clarity and accuracy\". It is the same family of tweeter the company uses further up its range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLee Dunkley gave them a Recommended badge in \u003cem\u003eAudiograde\u003c\/em\u003e on January 25, 2025: \"The bigger design pays off to deliver one of the most enjoyable and insightful sounds I’ve heard in a long time.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Schryer, in \u003cem\u003ePMA Magazine\u003c\/em\u003e on February 13, 2025: \"Not once during my audition of the British speakers did I think, ‘They need a subwoofer.’ The 100s sounded complete.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth flag the same practical point. Dunkley notes that \"despite the bookshelf categorisation, you’ll need to factor in the additional cost of a pair of dedicated speaker stands\". At nearly 31 pounds each, he is right.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want floorstander scale without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Australia\u003c\/em\u003e found they provide \"small floorstander levels of dynamic expression and low frequency depth coupled to a more compact form factor\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen for detail\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same review called them \"a lively, captivating loudspeaker capable of outstanding levels of detail and resolution\", which is what a dedicated midrange and a pleated tweeter are for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own a powerful amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 4 ohm nominal load with a 130 to 500 watt recommendation is not a job for a small integrated; one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e with real current, or a power amplifier, is the match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is mid-sized\u003c\/strong\u003e — Dunkley calls them \"easy to install speakers ideally suited to mid-sized rooms\", and 119 dB of headroom means they will not run out of room in one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBudget for stands\u003c\/strong\u003e — 17.6 inches tall and 30 pounds 14 ounces each puts these well past what a shelf should carry, so a dedicated pair of stands is part of the purchase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on the back of each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet them on stands rated for the weight, bring the tweeter to ear height, and give the rear port room to breathe. Then angle them in toward your seat. A 4 ohm speaker also deserves a cable of sensible gauge for the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Gold 100 6G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — not optional at nearly 31 pounds each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 to 500 watts into 4 ohms, with current to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a low-loss run sized for a 4 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional at 32 Hz, but there for film\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I really need a big amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Monitor Audio rates the speaker at 4 ohms nominal and recommends 130 to 500 watts into that load. The reviewers who praise it were driving it properly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRealistically, they will not. Each cabinet is 17.6 inches tall, 9.1 wide and 14.1 deep, and weighs 30 pounds 14 ounces. They belong on stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow low does the bass go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes 32 Hz in-room at minus 6 dB, with the port tuned to 38 Hz. One reviewer never once wished for a subwoofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is an MPD tweeter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA Micro Pleated Diaphragm: a folded, ribbon-like membrane rather than a dome. Monitor Audio’s third-generation version is here, and it is the same design family as its dearer ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are there?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMacassar wood veneer, High-Gloss Black and Satin White. Monitor Audio covers the speakers with a five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs there anything above this in the range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot among our bookshelf speakers. The Gold 100 6G is the top standmount we carry from Monitor Audio; beyond it, the Gold range moves to floorstanders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio introduces the Gold Series 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/eAFKdUtPCE0\" title=\"A Contemporary Classic: Gold Series 6G\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA British Audiophile spends fifteen minutes with a pair:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/YhvyhL69Ggw\" title=\"Monitor Audio Gold 100 6G Speaker Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about three-way speakers, matching an amplifier to a 4 ohm load, or choosing speaker stands? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45981618012333,"sku":"NEW-MRG6G100-WHT-PR","price":4599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRG6G100-WHT-PR_01_angle_2024__24175.1731255887.1280.1280_95ec4d9f-6815-40b1-8914-56189e4b4a8f.jpg?v=1778157701"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-foundation-b2-bookshelf-speaker-walnut-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion Foundation B2 Bookshelf Speaker - Walnut - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Largest Foundation Bookshelf, With the Folded Motion Tweeter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion Foundation B2 is the bigger of two bookshelf speakers in MartinLogan's entry Foundation series. It pairs the Gen2 Folded Motion Tweeter S with a 6.5-inch aluminum-cone woofer in a rear-ported cabinet 15 inches tall. It is sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFoundation is where MartinLogan's thin-film tweeter reaches its lowest price. The Tweeter S is a smaller version of the Folded Motion design: a pleated film diaphragm that squeezes air between its folds. It has 3.5 square inches of surface, still more than a 1-inch dome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Sounds Like a MartinLogan\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe folded film barely moves for a given output, which keeps the treble clean and quick. A waveguide controls dispersion to 90 degrees both ways. Below the 3,800 Hz crossover, the aluminum cone borrows its construction from the more expensive Motion series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 42 Hz to 23 kHz within 3 dB and 90 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 15 to 100 watts. That 42 Hz figure is the deepest bass in the Foundation series, and deeper than many bookshelf speakers at twice the size of this budget.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 7.75 inches wide, 15 tall and 11.5 deep, and weighs 15 pounds. Finishes are black with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim and satin white with silver trim. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. A removable grille covers the woofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA full written review of the B2 had not been published when we wrote this page. AV-Obsessed reviewed it on video in October 2024, embedded below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eAudioholics\u003c\/em\u003e previewed the Foundation series in August 2023 and noted that the B2 \"promises bass response down to 42Hz\" from a cabinet standing 15 inches tall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a MartinLogan on a tight budget\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Folded Motion tweeter at the lowest price the company offers it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want real bass from a bookshelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — 42 Hz from a 6.5-inch woofer covers nearly all music without a subwoofer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Foundation home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center\u003c\/a\u003e and the smaller Foundation B1 as surrounds share the tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a receiver or small amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 90 dB sensitivity and 15 to 100 watts recommended means almost anything will drive it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the bigger tweeter and a step up in finish\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e moves to the full-size Gen2 Obsidian tweeter and a woven fiberglass woofer in a smaller cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. The posts take banana plugs, spades or bare wire. There is one pair, so no bi-wiring. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, with several inches behind the rear port. Toe them in slightly toward the seat. The B2 also bolts to the STAND25 stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Foundation B2 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — puts the tweeter at ear height and bolts to the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-foundation-10-powered-subwoofer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eDynamo Foundation 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the series subwoofer, for film and the last octave\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural partner for a Foundation system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Foundation range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 15 to 100 watts. At 90 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, a receiver or a small integrated amplifier is plenty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the B2 different from the Foundation B1?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe B2 has a 6.5-inch woofer, a larger cabinet and bass to 42 Hz. The B1 has a 5.5-inch woofer, reaches 48 Hz and is about an inch shorter. Both use the same tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The B2 reaches 42 Hz, lower than almost anything on a record. For film, a subwoofer adds the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Foundation B2 has a single pair of 5-way binding posts, so a single run of cable is the only option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim, or satin white with silver trim. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAV-Obsessed reviews the Motion Foundation B2:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/flPNVlkBcTw\" title=\"Martin Logan Motion Foundation B2 Bookshelf Speakers Review - AV-Obsessed\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan introduces the Motion Foundation series:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PeKgT3DbV6s\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Foundation Overview - MartinLogan Speakers\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981630234797,"sku":"NEW-MLMOFOB2-WAL","price":337.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOFOB2_WAL_01_2023__92813.1719930137.1280.1280_e83868c2-8004-4fb4-b8b2-04c5bbff0723.jpg?v=1778146418"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-studio-89-bookshelf-speakers-gloss-white-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Studio 89 Bookshelf Speakers - Gloss White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA 1980s Name on a Thoroughly Modern Speaker\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Studio 89 borrows its name, and its gloss-black-with-gold-drivers look, from Monitor Audio’s Studio 15 of 1989. Everything else is current. Two 4.25-inch RDT III C-CAM mid-bass drivers flank an MPD III pleated tweeter in a cabinet just 6.2 inches wide and deeper than it is tall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat layout is called MTM, mid-tweeter-mid, and it is why the cabinet can be this narrow. Two small drivers move about as much air as one 6-inch unit, and placing them above and below the tweeter tightens vertical dispersion. The driver technology comes down from Monitor Audio’s Hyphn flagship.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRDT III: Three Layers, One Very Stiff Cone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cone is a sandwich: a ceramic-coated aluminum-magnesium skin over a Nomex honeycomb core, backed with woven carbon fiber. Monitor Audio’s own summary is \"super lightweight and very, very strong\", and the motor behind each cone uses a magnet larger than the cone itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes 48 Hz to 60 kHz in-room at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 86 dB. Nominal impedance is 6 ohms, with a minimum of 4.2 ohms, and the recommended amplifier is 50 to 300 watts. The crossover sits at 2.4 kHz and the twin rear slot ports are tuned to 58 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eHi-Fi News\u003c\/em\u003e measured sensitivity at 86.0 dB, matching the specification, with a 4.4 ohm minimum at 202 Hz. Each cabinet measures 13.4 by 6.2 by 14.2 inches and weighs 16 pounds 12 ounces. Monitor Audio makes a matching Studio 89 stand, and we stock it in both finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMPD III, the Tweeter That Is Not a Dome\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe high frequencies come from a Micro Pleated Diaphragm rather than a dome. Monitor Audio says: \"Its super-fast-reacting accordion-like pleats produce a smooth, wide and fast response.\" The waveguide and grille around it were taken from the Hyphn, and response is quoted out to 60 kHz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e gave them five stars on July 1, 2024: \"If we were asked to describe the Studio 89’s sound in three words it would be detailed, agile and polished.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSimon Lucas, also five stars in \u003cem\u003eTechRadar\u003c\/em\u003e the same day, said few speakers both inform and entertain: \"So it’s nice to be able to add the Studio 89 to the list.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLee Dunkley made them an Editor’s Pick in \u003cem\u003eAudiograde\u003c\/em\u003e on August 7, 2024, and found \"the Studio 89s are one of the least fussy speakers I’ve encountered in terms of placement\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a big soundstage from a narrow footprint\u003c\/strong\u003e — \u003cem\u003eAudiograde\u003c\/em\u003e heard \"a high-fidelity sound and scale that’s bigger than its compact dimensions might suggest\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is awkward\u003c\/strong\u003e — Dunkley found they keep \"a lovely sense of stereo soundstage even when plonked awkwardly in the room\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou value detail over slam\u003c\/strong\u003e — \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e called the presentation \"impeccably clean and precise without sounding overly analytical\", while \u003cem\u003eTechRadar\u003c\/em\u003e noted some rivals \"have greater bite and assertiveness\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want an easy amplifier match\u003c\/strong\u003e — 6 ohms nominal and 86 dB is a friendlier load than most speakers at this level, and \u003cem\u003eHi-Fi News\u003c\/em\u003e’ lab called it \"relatively painless\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou care how they look\u003c\/strong\u003e — gloss black or gloss white, both with gold drivers, and a matching stand that completes the design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to a single pair of rhodium-plated binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBolt them to their stands, which puts the tweeter at seated ear height, and leave room behind the two rear ports. \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e settled about 28 inches from the rear wall, angled slightly toward the listening seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Studio 89 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/monitor-audio-studio-89-speaker-stands-gloss\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eStudio 89 speaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching stand, in black or white, bolts to the cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 50 to 300 watts into 6 ohms; reviewers found they scale with better amplification\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a single run per side to the rhodium-plated posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional at 48 Hz, but there for film and the lowest octave\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio recommends 50 to 300 watts. At 6 ohms nominal and 86 dB these are not a hard load, but \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e found they \"excel when driven by a quality amplifier with a decent amount of grunt\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRealistically, no. Each cabinet is 14.2 inches deep with two rear-firing ports, so a shelf blocks the bass. They are designed for stands, and the matching Studio 89 stand bolts to the base.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does MTM mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMid-tweeter-mid: two identical mid-bass drivers with the tweeter between them. It controls vertical dispersion and lets a narrow cabinet move as much air as a wider one with a single larger driver.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBlack or white: is there a sonic difference?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo difference. Both are the same speaker under a different gloss paint, and both keep the gold-colored drivers. Gloss black is the finish that echoes the original Studio 15.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow do they compare with the Gold 100 6G?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 100 6G is a larger three-way with an 8-inch bass driver and deeper bass; the Studio 89 is narrower, an easier load, and images from a smaller footprint. Both are in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/monitor-audio\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMonitor Audio collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e advised that \"it pays to have realistic expectations in terms of bass reach and punch\", and 48 Hz in-room bears that out. For film, a subwoofer adds the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own look at the Studio 89:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/u4it8svtgpw\" title=\"Monitor Audio Studio 89 – Compact Powerhouse with High-End Sound!\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Absolute Sound reviews the Studio 89:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/VSx2oTJjZqs\" title=\"Monitor Audio Studio 89 Bookshelf Speakers Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, choosing an amplifier, or what an MTM array does? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"Gloss White \/ New","offer_id":45981642981549,"sku":"NEW-MRSTUDIO89-GLSWHT-PR","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRSTUDIO89-GLSWHT-PR_01_angle_2025__41038.1751291004.1280.1280_876cc13a-c61f-439a-9e7d-21607123070b.jpg?v=1778163126"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-mp10-multi-purpose-speaker-walnut-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion MP10 Multi-Purpose Speaker - Walnut - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Motion Speaker Built for Walls and Shallow Shelves\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion MP10 is the multi-purpose model in MartinLogan's Motion range. It uses the same Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion tweeter and 5.5-inch woven fiberglass woofer as the Motion B10, in a cabinet only 5 inches deep. It is sold by the each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shallow cabinet is the point. A Stealth Bass Port lets the MP10 reach bass output close to a normal bookshelf speaker at half the depth. A wall bracket is included, and the cabinet's angled shape lets it mount flat to the wall or flipped upside down.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy the Folded Motion Tweeter Matters Here\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA pleated film diaphragm squeezes air between its folds, so it barely has to move. It keeps treble clean and fast. Because the MP10 shares its tweeter with the B10, XT B100 and Motion towers, it blends with them as a surround, height or rear channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 81 Hz to 25 kHz within 3 dB and 92 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 20 to 200 watts, and dispersion is 90 degrees both ways. The crossover sits at 2,100 Hz. The 81 Hz limit tells you this is a speaker for surround duty or a subwoofer partnership.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 8 inches wide, 14 tall and 5 deep with feet, and weighs 9.7 pounds. Finishes are gloss black, walnut and satin white. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. The mounting bracket is in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWe have not found a published written review of the MP10 on its own. Reviewers who use it treat it as the surround and height speaker of the Motion system. Shane Lee's video review below shows it in that role.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Motion home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the MP10 is the surround and height speaker made for the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-b100-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT B100\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e and Motion towers, with the same tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need speakers on the wall\u003c\/strong\u003e — 5 inches deep with a bracket in the box, mountable flat or flipped for high placement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a shallow shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Stealth port keeps bass output up where a normal rear port would need room behind\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a receiver\u003c\/strong\u003e — 92 dB sensitivity and a 5 ohm load suit any AV receiver channel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want it as your main stereo pair\u003c\/strong\u003e — it can do that in a small room, but the 81 Hz limit means you will want a subwoofer; for main duty without one, choose the Motion B10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the binding posts, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. For surround use, set your receiver's crossover for these channels at 80 Hz or higher.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn a wall, use the included bracket and choose the angle that points the tweeter toward the seats. Flipped mounting suits high side walls. On a shelf, the shallow cabinet needs only a little clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most MP10 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-xt-c100-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion XT C100 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center for a Motion XT front stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-10-powered-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan Dynamo 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — essential if the MP10 is a main channel, and welcome in any surround system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a receiver with room correction sets the crossover and levels for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — in-wall rated cable for surround runs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. Order two for a stereo or surround pair, or four for surrounds and heights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the wall bracket included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The bracket is in the box and allows flat or flipped mounting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use the MP10 as a main speaker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIn a small room with a subwoofer, yes. Its 81 Hz low limit is higher than a normal bookshelf speaker, so plan on a subwoofer crossed over at 80 to 100 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 20 to 200 watts. At 92 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, any receiver channel will do.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it match the Motion B10 and XT B100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. It shares the Gen2 Obsidian Folded Motion tweeter and the woven fiberglass woofer with the B10, so timbre matches across the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShane Lee reviews a Motion system with the MP10 as surrounds:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PGqHkArXsKo\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Series Review - Motion F20, C10, MP10 - Shane Lee\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHiFi Home Theater's performance review of the MP10:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/aUeB0v6l5FI\" title=\"Martin Logan Motion MP10 - Performance review - HiFi Home Theater\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981692264621,"sku":"NEW-MLMOMP10-WAL","price":439.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOMP10_WAL_01-Large__76334.1731171073.1280.1280_8286811a-ff0e-4b98-9254-51658c8a6176.jpg?v=1778108293"},{"product_id":"leak-sandwich-250-loudspeakers-walnut-pair","title":"LEAK Sandwich 250 Loudspeakers - Walnut - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe 1961 Sandwich Cone, Rebuilt at Full Scale\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Sandwich 250 is the largest speaker in LEAK's revived Sandwich range. It is a three-way standmount with an 11-inch bass driver, a 4.25-inch midrange and a 1.2-inch coated textile dome tweeter. The cabinet is nearly 26 inches tall, and the speakers are sold as a mirror-imaged pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK introduced the original Sandwich in 1961. Its cone bonded two aluminum skins to a foam core and was far stiffer than the paper cones of the day. The new cone keeps that idea with a core of PMI structural foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Stiff Cone Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA cone that flexes adds distortion. LEAK says the Sandwich cone moves as one piece across its range, free from mechanical break-up. Both the bass and midrange drivers use it. The tweeter has a damped rear chamber that pulls its resonance below the 3.1 kHz crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK quotes 42 Hz to 26 kHz within 3 dB, with bass extension to 32 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 88.5 dB and impedance is 6 ohms nominal with a 4 ohm minimum. LEAK recommends 25 to 250 watts, and peak output is rated at 112 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 14.6 inches wide, 25.8 tall and 13 deep with terminals, and weighs 60 pounds, which is floorstander weight in a standmount. The finish is real walnut veneer with aluminum trim, and a cloth grille and rubber feet are included. Binding posts come with links fitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAbout the Stand\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK's matching stand is about 15 inches tall, with a top plate sized to the cabinet and a veneered plinth. The manual says the 250 should not be used on the floor or without a stand. We offer the speakers alone or with the LEAK stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e introduced the Sandwich 150 and 250 on February 5, 2024, as a classic 1961 design \"injected with plenty of modern technology to make what looks like a very tasty treat.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson made the Sandwich 250 a Best Speaker 2024 nominee on his YouTube channel in June 2024. Five days later, in a follow-up episode, he named it his best vintage-inspired speaker of the year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTechRadar's Becky Scarrott headlined her February 2024 preview: \"I've waited 63 years for a Sandwich – but Leak speakers are always worth the wait.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want floorstander scale without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — an 11-inch woofer in a 45.5-liter cabinet reaches 32 Hz and moves real air in a large room\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou love the 1960s look and want it done properly\u003c\/strong\u003e — walnut veneer, aluminum trim and the countersunk rear screws of the original, built by the company that made it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have, or want, a LEAK system\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-230-integrated-amplifier-walnut\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 230\u003c\/a\u003e sits in the recommended power range and shares the walnut and aluminum styling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is comfortable with 4 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e — 88.5 dB sensitivity is easy, but the 4 ohm minimum means a receiver rated only for 8 ohms is not the right partner\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is small\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is a big speaker on a big stand; the two-way \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-sandwich-150-loudspeakers-walnut-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSandwich 150\u003c\/a\u003e gives the same cone and tweeter in half the size\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. Leave the terminal links in place for a normal single run. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on the stands, away from the wall behind the rear port. LEAK's manual warns that placing them too close to a wall makes the bass boomy and suggests toe-in of up to 30 percent. Leave the grilles on, since LEAK says they aid dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Sandwich 250 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-230-integrated-amplifier-walnut\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 230\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — LEAK's more powerful integrated amplifier, in matching walnut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-trustream-network-player\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK TruStream network player\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — streaming source in the same LEAK styling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-cdt-cd-transport\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK CDT CD transport\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching CD transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a heavier gauge for the 4 ohm minimum and long runs to wide-spaced speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Sandwich 250 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, mirror-imaged left and right, with grilles and rubber feet. Choose the version with LEAK stands if you do not already have stands rated for 60 pounds each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need the LEAK stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYou need a stand of some kind. LEAK says not to use the 250 on the floor or without a stand. Most standard stands are too small for a cabinet this wide and heavy, so the matching stand is the safe choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK recommends 25 to 250 watts. Sensitivity is high at 88.5 dB, so modest power plays loud. The impedance dips to 4 ohms, so choose an amplifier rated for 4 ohm loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a sandwich cone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA cone built like an aircraft panel. Two thin aluminum skins are bonded to a light, stiff foam core. The result is far more rigid than a paper or plastic cone of the same weight, so it moves as one piece instead of flexing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eShould I use the grilles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. LEAK designed the grilles as part of the speaker and says the driver dispersion is better with them on. Removing them changes the balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 250 different from the Sandwich 150?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 250 is a three-way with an 11-inch woofer and a separate midrange. The 150 is a two-way with a 6.5-inch mid-bass driver. The 250 goes deeper, plays louder and needs a larger room and stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Sandwich 250:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/OirHxi5VFeM\" title=\"BEST SPEAKER 2024 Nominee! LEAK Sandwich 250 Speaker Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson's best vintage-inspired speaker of 2024:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/RFrje6t6ukQ\" title=\"The BEST VINTAGE (inspired) SPEAKER Is...? Leak Sandwich 250 Episode - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"LEAK","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981740466349,"sku":"NEW-LESW250-WAL-PR","price":2995.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/LESW250-WAL-PR_01_angle_2024__26025.1730733720.1280.1280_abe0e602-d7d1-4a7a-9ec9-7d5b1b0d8b3b.jpg?v=1778158603"},{"product_id":"bowers-wilkins-607-s3-bookshelf-speakers-white-pair","title":"Bowers \u0026 Wilkins 607 S3 Bookshelf Speakers - White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W’s Smallest Standmount, Built From the Same Parts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 607 S3 is a two-way vented-box design. A 5-inch Continuum cone covers bass and midrange, with a 1-inch Decoupled Double Dome Titanium tweeter above it. Both come from the same engineering as B\u0026amp;W’s larger ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.8 inches tall, 6.5 wide and 9.3 deep with the grille and terminals fitted, and each weighs 10.3 pounds. This is the compact end of the range, and it fits places a bigger standmount cannot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eContinuum, and Why the Cone Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eContinuum is the composite cone B\u0026amp;W spent eight years in development for the 800 Series Diamond. It is built to behave consistently as it moves rather than changing character partway, which is what your ear notices most on voices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W quotes a frequency range of 40 Hz to 33 kHz at minus 6 dB, and a response of 52 Hz to 28 kHz within 3 dB. Sensitivity is 84 dB. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms with a minimum of 3.0 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHarmonic distortion stays under 1 percent from 100 Hz to 22 kHz, and under 0.5 percent between 500 Hz and 10 kHz. B\u0026amp;W recommends 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms on unclipped programme, and speaker cable under 0.1 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Foam Inserts Change the Bass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear Flowport vents each cabinet, and B\u0026amp;W supplies two ways to tame it. Foam plugs cut the bass most, while foam rings do the same thing more gently, and both matter when a speaker ends up closer to a wall than you would like.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e made the 607 S3 an Awards 2024 winner: \"There’s clarity and refinement in the mix here – to a really admirable level – but we’re struck by just how entertaining, zippy and musical this new pair sounds.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSimon Lucas reviewed them for \u003cem\u003eTechRadar\u003c\/em\u003e on August 18, 2024. On the balance B\u0026amp;W struck: \"There’s plenty of refinement here, but there’s even more brio.\" His summary was that \"These speakers prove that small can sound beautiful\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth flag the same caveat. \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e notes the 607 S3’s \"enthusiastic character leads to a rather forward presentation, and any similarly top-heavy kit can exacerbate that quality\", advising \"a more balanced amplifier\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is small and your shelf is smaller\u003c\/strong\u003e — under 12 inches tall and just over 10 pounds each, so they go where a larger standmount will not, and they still use the same drivers B\u0026amp;W puts in bigger cabinets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen close\u003c\/strong\u003e — a compact two-way with the tweeter right above the mid keeps the drivers close together, which is what makes a nearfield seat sound coherent rather than split in two\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThey will sit near a wall\u003c\/strong\u003e — B\u0026amp;W supplies both foam plugs and gentler foam rings for the port, so you can dial the bass back by degrees instead of moving furniture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a starting point, not a compromise\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Continuum cone and Titanium Dome tweeter are the same ideas as further up the range, so the character is consistent if you build outward later\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCheck your amplifier first\u003c\/strong\u003e — 84 dB sensitivity is on the low side and the load dips to 3.0 ohms, so B\u0026amp;W asks for 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms; a small streaming amp will run out of room, and one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e in that window will not\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the single pair of binding posts on each cabinet, and both runs should be the same length. B\u0026amp;W asks that the cable stay under 0.1 ohms, which is a question of gauge and distance rather than brand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W designed these primarily for its FS-600 S3 floor stand, and says a shelf works but gives less room to optimize. On a shelf, fit the four self-adhesive rubber feet supplied, and keep the cabinets at least half a meter from the back and side walls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most 607 S3 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — what B\u0026amp;W designed these for, and not included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms is the window\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — under 0.1 ohms total, so gauge and length matter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for the bottom octave a 5-inch driver cannot reach\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier do these need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W recommends 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms on unclipped programme. Sensitivity is 84 dB and the impedance dips to 3.0 ohms, so give them a little more power than the size suggests.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo they come with stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStands are separate. B\u0026amp;W built these around its FS-600 S3 stand, though a shelf is perfectly workable if you use the supplied rubber feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat are the foam plugs for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThey fit the rear port and reduce bass when a speaker sits close to a wall. Foam rings are also supplied and do the same thing more gently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow far from the wall should they sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eB\u0026amp;W asks for at least half a meter from the back and side walls. Closer than that, reach for the foam inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat if I want more scale than this?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStep up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/bowers-wilkins-606-s3-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eBowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 606 S3\u003c\/a\u003e. It uses a 6.5-inch Continuum cone, reads 88 dB sensitivity, and takes up to 120 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow big and heavy are they?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.8 inches tall, 6.5 wide and 9.3 deep with grille and terminals, and weighs 10.3 pounds. They ship as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own walkthrough of the 607 S3:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/yxhqeD2fk5g\" title=\"Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 607 S3: Award-Winning Compact Speakers Redefine Sound!\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTaps Das reviews them for \u003cem\u003eSecrets of Home Theater and High Fidelity\u003c\/em\u003e:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/7kiorjixe2s\" title=\"Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins 607 S3 Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, matching an amplifier to your speakers, or bookshelf speakers generally? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Bowers and Wilkins","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45981766615213,"sku":"NEW-BW607S3-WHT","price":1000.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/BW607S3_WHT_01_2023__51468.1730953572.1280.1280_31bdcba3-f98e-4a8d-adb2-39750c8a42a2.jpg?v=1778147113"},{"product_id":"mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-8-loudspeakers-black-ash-with-stands-pair","title":"MoFi Electronics SourcePoint 8 Loudspeakers - Black Ash with Stands - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAndrew Jones's Point-Source Speaker, in a Size for Real Rooms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe SourcePoint 8 is the smaller of Andrew Jones's two concentric standmounts for MoFi Electronics. An 8-inch woofer carries a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter at its center, so both drivers launch sound from one point. The cabinet is 18 inches tall, and the speakers are sold as a pair, with or without MoFi's matching stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJones designed concentric drivers at KEF, Pioneer, TAD and ELAC before MoFi. His idea here is a two-way with a woofer large enough to reach the bass. The tweeter never has to strain, and the crossover can sit low, at 1.6 kHz. The woofer cone doubles as a waveguide for the tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy One Point Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhen treble and midrange come from the same spot, the sound stays the same as you move around the room. The stereo image holds together. MoFi's Twin-Drive motor uses two neodymium magnets for a symmetrical field, which the company says cuts intermodulation distortion. A faceted baffle reduces diffraction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi quotes 47 Hz to 30 kHz, 87 dB sensitivity and 8 ohms nominal with a 6.4 ohm minimum. The minimum recommended power is 30 watts. The maximum input is 150 watts. Stereophile measured the sensitivity as specified and called it an easy load, so tube amplifiers are a real option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11.4 inches wide, 18 tall and 12.6 deep without the grille, and weighs 27.9 pounds. Finishes are satin walnut or satin black ash real-wood veneer, or painted satin white. Magnetic grilles are included, and a single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. The warranty is five years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the SourcePoint 8 in Class B of its Recommended Components, 2025 and 2026 editions. The entry cites Kalman Rubinson's review: \"they generate a fairly wide and deep soundstage that is notably transparent and detailed.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNeil Gader of \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e gave it a 2024 Golden Ear Award: \"Bass response is forceful, controlled, and accurate in pitch.\" He added: \"I called it the most satisfying compact I'd heard all year. I still do.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDave Berriman reviewed it for \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e on February 13, 2024, finding \"an uncanny ability to set up precise stereo images within an almost holographic soundstage.\" Stereophile noted little output below 50 Hz, but \"tight, powerful bass\" above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want pinpoint imaging and a wide sweet spot\u003c\/strong\u003e — the concentric driver is why three reviewers led with the soundstage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a tube amplifier or a modest integrated\u003c\/strong\u003e — 87 dB, 8 ohms and a 6.4 ohm minimum make an easy load; 30 watts is enough\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a big-speaker sound in a medium room\u003c\/strong\u003e — an 8-inch woofer and an 18-inch cabinet give scale that 5-inch two-ways cannot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want it to look like furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — book-matched veneer, a faceted baffle and magnetic grilles in three finishes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the deepest bass and highest efficiency\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-sourcepoint-10-master-edition-loudspeakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSourcePoint 10 Master Edition\u003c\/a\u003e adds a 10-inch driver, 42 Hz extension and 91 dB sensitivity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. Any integrated or tube amplifier of 30 watts or more will drive them well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the driver near ear height, a foot or more from the wall behind the rear port. Stereophile found the clearest center image with the speakers toed in about halfway between straight ahead and aimed at the seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most SourcePoint 8 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-sourcepoint-8-speaker-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi SourcePoint 8 stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sized to the cabinet footprint, or choose the with-stands version of this listing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the easy load and 87 dB sensitivity suit low-power tube designs as well as solid state\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-ultradeck\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi UltraDeck turntable\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mofi-electronics-studiophono-mm-mc-phono-preamplifier\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMoFi StudioPhono phono preamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a matching MoFi analog front end\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the octave below 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the SourcePoint 8 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with grilles. Choose the version with stands if you want MoFi's matching stands in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMoFi recommends at least 30 watts and rates the speaker for 150 watts maximum. Stereophile called it an easy load, so tube amplifiers and small integrateds are fine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a concentric driver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA tweeter mounted at the center of the woofer. Both drivers radiate from the same point. The sound stays consistent off axis and the stereo image is precise. Andrew Jones has built speakers this way for decades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. MoFi quotes 47 Hz and Stereophile heard tight, powerful bass above 50 Hz. For film or deep electronic bass, a subwoofer completes it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 8 different from the SourcePoint 10 Master Edition?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 10 has a 10-inch driver, reaches 42 Hz, is 4 dB more sensitive and weighs 46 pounds each. The 8 is two-thirds the size and fits rooms and stands the 10 cannot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSatin walnut or satin black ash real-wood veneer, or painted satin white. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the SourcePoint 8:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/3DQERxkB92k\" title=\"Is this REALLY an ANDREW JONES Speaker? SourcePoint 8 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the SourcePoint 8:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/h90tqdGsgP4\" title=\"Why Do People Love the MoFi SourcePoint 8? - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MoFi Electronics","offers":[{"title":"Black with Stands \/ New","offer_id":45981838213293,"sku":"NEW-MOSP8-BLKSTA","price":2594.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/sourcepoint-8-black-ash-facing-right-corrected.jpg?v=1785703689"},{"product_id":"leak-sandwich-250-loudspeakers-walnut-w-stands-pair","title":"LEAK Sandwich 250 Loudspeakers - Walnut w\/Stands - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe 1961 Sandwich Cone, Rebuilt at Full Scale\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Sandwich 250 is the largest speaker in LEAK's revived Sandwich range. It is a three-way standmount with an 11-inch bass driver, a 4.25-inch midrange and a 1.2-inch coated textile dome tweeter. The cabinet is nearly 26 inches tall, and the speakers are sold as a mirror-imaged pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK introduced the original Sandwich in 1961. Its cone bonded two aluminum skins to a foam core and was far stiffer than the paper cones of the day. The new cone keeps that idea with a core of PMI structural foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Stiff Cone Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA cone that flexes adds distortion. LEAK says the Sandwich cone moves as one piece across its range, free from mechanical break-up. Both the bass and midrange drivers use it. The tweeter has a damped rear chamber that pulls its resonance below the 3.1 kHz crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK quotes 42 Hz to 26 kHz within 3 dB, with bass extension to 32 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 88.5 dB and impedance is 6 ohms nominal with a 4 ohm minimum. LEAK recommends 25 to 250 watts, and peak output is rated at 112 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 14.6 inches wide, 25.8 tall and 13 deep with terminals, and weighs 60 pounds, which is floorstander weight in a standmount. The finish is real walnut veneer with aluminum trim, and a cloth grille and rubber feet are included. Binding posts come with links fitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAbout the Stand\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK's matching stand is about 15 inches tall, with a top plate sized to the cabinet and a veneered plinth. The manual says the 250 should not be used on the floor or without a stand. We offer the speakers alone or with the LEAK stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e introduced the Sandwich 150 and 250 on February 5, 2024, as a classic 1961 design \"injected with plenty of modern technology to make what looks like a very tasty treat.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson made the Sandwich 250 a Best Speaker 2024 nominee on his YouTube channel in June 2024. Five days later, in a follow-up episode, he named it his best vintage-inspired speaker of the year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTechRadar's Becky Scarrott headlined her February 2024 preview: \"I've waited 63 years for a Sandwich – but Leak speakers are always worth the wait.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want floorstander scale without a floorstander\u003c\/strong\u003e — an 11-inch woofer in a 45.5-liter cabinet reaches 32 Hz and moves real air in a large room\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou love the 1960s look and want it done properly\u003c\/strong\u003e — walnut veneer, aluminum trim and the countersunk rear screws of the original, built by the company that made it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have, or want, a LEAK system\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-230-integrated-amplifier-walnut\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 230\u003c\/a\u003e sits in the recommended power range and shares the walnut and aluminum styling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is comfortable with 4 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e — 88.5 dB sensitivity is easy, but the 4 ohm minimum means a receiver rated only for 8 ohms is not the right partner\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is small\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is a big speaker on a big stand; the two-way \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-sandwich-150-loudspeakers-walnut-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSandwich 150\u003c\/a\u003e gives the same cone and tweeter in half the size\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. Leave the terminal links in place for a normal single run. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on the stands, away from the wall behind the rear port. LEAK's manual warns that placing them too close to a wall makes the bass boomy and suggests toe-in of up to 30 percent. Leave the grilles on, since LEAK says they aid dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Sandwich 250 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-230-integrated-amplifier-walnut\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 230\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — LEAK's more powerful integrated amplifier, in matching walnut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-trustream-network-player\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK TruStream network player\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — streaming source in the same LEAK styling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-cdt-cd-transport\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK CDT CD transport\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching CD transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a heavier gauge for the 4 ohm minimum and long runs to wide-spaced speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Sandwich 250 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, mirror-imaged left and right, with grilles and rubber feet. Choose the version with LEAK stands if you do not already have stands rated for 60 pounds each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need the LEAK stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYou need a stand of some kind. LEAK says not to use the 250 on the floor or without a stand. Most standard stands are too small for a cabinet this wide and heavy, so the matching stand is the safe choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK recommends 25 to 250 watts. Sensitivity is high at 88.5 dB, so modest power plays loud. The impedance dips to 4 ohms, so choose an amplifier rated for 4 ohm loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a sandwich cone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA cone built like an aircraft panel. Two thin aluminum skins are bonded to a light, stiff foam core. The result is far more rigid than a paper or plastic cone of the same weight, so it moves as one piece instead of flexing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eShould I use the grilles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. LEAK designed the grilles as part of the speaker and says the driver dispersion is better with them on. Removing them changes the balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 250 different from the Sandwich 150?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 250 is a three-way with an 11-inch woofer and a separate midrange. The 150 is a two-way with a 6.5-inch mid-bass driver. The 250 goes deeper, plays louder and needs a larger room and stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Sandwich 250:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/OirHxi5VFeM\" title=\"BEST SPEAKER 2024 Nominee! LEAK Sandwich 250 Speaker Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson's best vintage-inspired speaker of 2024:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/RFrje6t6ukQ\" title=\"The BEST VINTAGE (inspired) SPEAKER Is...? Leak Sandwich 250 Episode - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"LEAK","offers":[{"title":"Walnut with Stands \/ New","offer_id":45981858529453,"sku":"NEW-LESW250-WALSTA-PR","price":3695.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/LESW250-WALSTA-PR_01_angle_2024__17637.1730733399.1280.1280_8aa6f2f7-c66f-4093-9fc6-42a6fc49c1bc.jpg?v=1778158624"},{"product_id":"elac-carina-bs-243-4-bookshelf-speakers-satin-black-pair","title":"ELAC Carina BS 243.4 Bookshelf Speakers - Satin Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA JET Tweeter in a Foot-Tall Cabinet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Carina BS 243.4 is a two-way standmount built around ELAC's JET folded-ribbon tweeter, the same air-motion design the company uses in its far more expensive speakers. Below it sits a 5.25-inch aluminum woofer with a compound-curvature cone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Jones designed the Carina line, and it is the first of his ELAC speakers to use the JET tweeter. The curved aluminum cone pushes its breakup well above the crossover, which sits at 2.7 kHz. The port fires downward through the base.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy the Port Points at the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA down-firing port is less sensitive to what is behind the speaker, so the Carina is easier to place near a wall than most rear-ported designs. It also keeps port noise away from the listener.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC quotes 46 Hz to 30 kHz, 85 dB sensitivity at 2.83 volts and a 6 ohm nominal impedance with a 4.8 ohm minimum. Recommended amplifier power is 30 to 150 watts, with 100 watts peak handling. At 85 dB these want a capable amplifier rather than a small receiver.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is about 8.5 inches wide, 12.5 tall and 8 deep, and weighs 14.7 pounds. The side walls are not parallel, which breaks up internal reflections. Finishes are satin black or satin white.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNeil Gader reviewed the Carina BS243.4 for \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e on March 13, 2020, describing \"a sonic signature defined by a ripe, rich midrange laden with darker walnut overtones.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the tweeter: \"Critically, the JET tweeter never grows overly assertive.\" His one caveat was that in his room the Carina \"tended on occasion to impart a thickness to the bass range,\" so give it space from the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis close, weighing the whole package against its price class: \"On a scale of sheer musicality and value, it rates very high in my book.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a ribbon-style tweeter without the usual price\u003c\/strong\u003e — the JET is ELAC's signature driver, and this is the least expensive Andrew Jones speaker to carry it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen for tone and ease\u003c\/strong\u003e — Gader heard a rich, slightly dark midrange and a treble that never gets aggressive, which suits long sessions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers must sit near a wall\u003c\/strong\u003e — the down-firing port is far more forgiving of a shelf or a tight spot than a rear port\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a good amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 85 dB and a 4.8 ohm minimum want a real \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e of 50 watts or more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou play bass-heavy music loud in a small room\u003c\/strong\u003e — Gader found the midbass could thicken; pull them out from the wall or consider a larger, leaner speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to a single pair of binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands so the tweeter is near ear height. Gader pulled his a couple of feet from the wall to keep the bass in balance; start there and move closer only if the bass sounds lean.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Carina owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 150 watts, comfortable into 4 ohms\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/elac-ls-80-speaker-stands-23-inch-gray-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eELAC LS-80 speaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — ELAC's own 23-inch stands\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/music-streamers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMusic streamers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean source for a detailed tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a sensible gauge for a 6 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Carina BS 243.4 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, with grilles in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eELAC recommends 30 to 150 watts. Sensitivity is 85 dB and impedance dips to 4.8 ohms, so choose an amplifier that is happy into 4 ohms and budget 50 watts or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a JET tweeter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA folded-ribbon design based on the air-motion transformer principle. A pleated film squeezes air out of its folds rather than pushing it like a dome. It moves very fast and with very little mass, which is where its speed and low distortion come from.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan they go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBetter than most. The port fires down through the base, so a wall behind them matters less. Leave the bottom of the cabinet clear so the port can breathe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The Carina reaches 46 Hz, and Gader was surprised by the low-end weight from a 5.25-inch driver. For film, a subwoofer adds the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSatin black and satin white. Both are painted finishes over a cabinet with non-parallel side walls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Jones explains the Carina to Audio Advisor:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/FTKeW9LUzCE\" title=\"ELAC's Andrew Jones Explains His New Carina Speaker - Audio Advisor\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJay's iyagi reviews the BS 243.4:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/ckUHdHEL860\" title=\"Andrew's first AMT speaker is no ordinary speaker - Elac Carina bs243.4 Speaker review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"ELAC","offers":[{"title":"New \/ Satin Black \/ Pair \/ New","offer_id":45981892280493,"sku":"NEW-ELCABS243-SATBLK-PR","price":1199.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/ELCABS243_SATBLK_01-Large__44673.1731058181.1280.1280_1ba1fe29-450d-48a6-89a1-e26c81f548ac.jpg?v=1778135164"},{"product_id":"mission-m700-bookshelf-speakers-with-stands-walnut-pair","title":"Mission M700 Bookshelf Speakers with Stands - Walnut - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe 1980 Benchmark, Rebuilt With Stands Included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Mission 700 is a two-way standmount with a 6.5-inch mineral-loaded polypropylene woofer and a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter, mounted tweeter-below-woofer in Mission's inverted layout. The cabinet is 20 inches tall and holds 24.8 liters. This listing includes Mission's matching stands, and the speakers are sold as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe original 700 of 1980 put Mission's inverted driver layout on the map. Placing the tweeter below the woofer evens the path lengths to a seated listener, which improves time alignment. The new 700 keeps the white baffle and the logo, but its drivers, crossover and cabinet are new designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Sounds Bigger Than Most Standmounts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA 24.8-liter cabinet is large for a two-way, and it lets the 6.5-inch driver reach 45 Hz. The cabinet is a sandwich of two woods bonded with damping adhesive, braced and lined with foam and long-hair fiber. The crossover sits at 3 kHz on separate bass and treble boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission quotes 45 Hz to 20 kHz within 3 dB, with bass extension to 38 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 86 dB, impedance 8 ohms nominal with a 5.2 ohm minimum. Recommended power is 25 to 150 watts, and peak output is rated at 106 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 10.2 inches wide, 20.1 tall and 11.5 deep with terminals, and weighs 28 pounds. The included stand is 19 inches tall on its spikes, with a 12.6 by 13 inch base, and weighs 14 pounds. Finishes are walnut or black real-wood veneer with the white baffle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the 700 on October 2, 2022: \"These boxes sound impressively big and authoritative.\" A 2025 update kept the rating but noted \"they lack the subtlety and finesse of class leaders.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEd Selley, \u003cem\u003eAVForums\u003c\/em\u003e, October 13, 2022: \"if it's 'drive' and 'attack' you value, the Mission 700 will be just the ticket.\" His caution: a bright amplifier could deliver \"rather too much of a good thing.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDavid Price of \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e, April 18, 2023, called it \"a lively character who just wants to go out and party.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a big, bold, forward sound\u003c\/strong\u003e — three reviewers heard scale, drive and attack; this is not a polite speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — 38 Hz extension from a 24.8-liter cabinet covers nearly all music\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want stands sorted\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching Mission stands are in this package, sized to the cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is smooth rather than bright\u003c\/strong\u003e — AVForums warned that a treble-happy amplifier is too much of a good thing here\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the most refined version of the idea\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-m770-speakers-with-stands-walnut-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 770\u003c\/a\u003e adds an 8-inch driver, a 38.5-liter cabinet and the reviews to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. At 86 dB sensitivity, an integrated amplifier of 50 watts or more is a comfortable match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAssemble the stands, place the speakers about three feet from the wall behind them and well clear of the sides, and angle them in toward the seat. What Hi-Fi? found toe-in improved focus and image solidity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Mission 700 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-778x-integrated-amplifier-silver\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 778X integrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Mission's own integrated amplifier, styled to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth-sounding 50 to 100 watt amplifier suits the 700's lively treble\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a quality single run for each speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional for film; the 700 covers music on its own\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the stands included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. This listing is the pair of speakers with the matching Mission 700 stands in the same finish. Check the title for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission recommends 25 to 150 watts. At 86 dB sensitivity, a 50 watt integrated amplifier is a good starting point. Choose one with a smooth top end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy is the tweeter below the woofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt evens the distance from each driver to a seated listener, which improves time alignment and imaging. Mission has used the layout since the original 700.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The 700 reaches 38 Hz at minus 6 dB. For film, a subwoofer adds the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 700 different from the Mission 750 and 770?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-m750-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 750\u003c\/a\u003e is the compact model with a 5.25-inch driver and no stands. The 770 is the flagship with an 8-inch driver and a 38.5-liter cabinet. The 700 sits in the middle with a 6.5-inch driver and stands included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow tall is the speaker on its stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 19 inches tall on its spikes and the cabinet is 20 inches, so the tweeter lands near seated ear height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Mission 700:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/HefaECw7_WA\" title=\"SAVE or SPLURGE on Mission Speakers? MISSION 700 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHi-Fi Riff on the reimagined Mission 700:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/v8yMeieDm4k\" title=\"A Kick Up the Eighties - Mission's Classic 700 Standmounter Reimagined - Hi-Fi Riff\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Mission","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981917675693,"sku":"NEW-MNM700-WAL","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MNM700_WAL_06-Large__74076.1731172214.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778134389"},{"product_id":"polk-audio-reserve-r200-bookshelf-speakers-brown-pair","title":"Polk Audio Reserve R200 Bookshelf Speakers - Brown - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Larger Reserve Bookshelf, With a 6.5-Inch Woofer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Reserve R200 is the bigger of Polk Audio's two Reserve bookshelf speakers. It pairs the 1-inch Pinnacle ring radiator tweeter from Polk's flagship Legend series with a 6.5-inch Turbine Cone woofer, in a cabinet just over 14 inches tall. The speakers are sold as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk launched the Reserve series in 2021 as the step below Legend, and gave every model the same tweeter and cone design. The R200 is the Reserve speaker for listeners who want real bass from a standmount without moving up to a floorstander.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Drivers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tweeter has a pointed center plug and a waveguide that Polk says widens the sweet spot. The woofer uses a molded foam-core cone with a turbine pattern for stiffness without added mass, and it crosses over to the tweeter at 3,000 Hz. Grilles are magnetic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk quotes an overall response of 39 Hz to 50 kHz, with the minus 3 dB limits at 51 Hz and 38 kHz. Sensitivity is 86 dB at 2.83 volts. The minimum impedance is 3.8 ohms, and the recommended amplifier power is 30 to 200 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe impedance dip means the R200 wants an amplifier or receiver that is rated for 4-ohm speakers. Polk lists it as compatible with 8, 6 and 4 ohm outputs. Sound+Image found the speakers relish being turned up and driven with quality power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize, Port and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 7.5 inches wide, 14.1 tall and 13.9 deep including the feet, and weighs 19.1 pounds. The rear X-Port uses closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet to cancel port resonance. Audio Advisor stocks black, white and brown. The Reserve series carries Polk's five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e published \u003cem\u003eSound+Image\u003c\/em\u003e's review in September 2021: \"The R200 proved truthful at both low levels and high, able to deliver a solid bass and a remarkable clarity of midrange\" that the reviewers credited partly to the X-Port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe reviewers did not learn the price until the end. \"We'd have put them at least double the actual price,\" they wrote, and called the R200 a bargain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e named the R200 a 2021 Stand-Mount Loudspeaker of the Year. Reviewer Neil Gader wrote: \"the R200 cuts right to the heart of the music by outputting tunes and tones with equal measures of accuracy, dynamism, and immediacy.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want standmount bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 6.5-inch woofer and 39 Hz overall response are as deep as the Reserve bookshelves go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a forward, lively presentation\u003c\/strong\u003e — The Absolute Sound described a monitor-style sound with warmth in the midrange\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Reserve home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the R200 matches the R400 center and R900 height modules for a consistent voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a medium or large room\u003c\/strong\u003e — Sound+Image found the R200 rewards being turned up and driven with quality power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a smaller cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r100-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eReserve R100\u003c\/a\u003e is 1.3 inches shorter and 7 pounds lighter, with the same tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the dual binding posts on each speaker, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so nothing plugs into the wall. Polk recommends 30 to 200 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands with the tweeter near ear height. Sound+Image found the imaging best from a seat dead center between the speakers, and heard uniform response across a wide sweet spot. Leave room behind the cabinet for the rear port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most R200 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r400-center-channel-speaker-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R400 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest Reserve center, with the same drivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r900-height-module\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R900 height module\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sits on top of a Reserve speaker for Dolby Atmos height channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — choose one rated for 4-ohm speakers with 50 watts or more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the last half octave below 51 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the R200 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with magnetic grilles. Audio Advisor stocks black, white and brown. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much power do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk recommends 30 to 200 watts per channel. Because the impedance dips to 3.8 ohms, choose an amplifier or receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. Polk quotes 39 Hz overall and 51 Hz at minus 3 dB, and Sound+Image heard solid bass. For film or deep electronic bass, add a subwoofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the X-Port?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear port with closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet's internal resonance. Polk says it keeps the bass output of a port while cancelling the resonances a plain port adds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the R200 different from the R100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe R200 has a 6.5-inch woofer instead of 5.25, reaches 39 Hz instead of 44, handles 200 watts instead of 150, and weighs 19.1 pounds each instead of 12.2.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they work with a receiver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Any receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers with 30 watts or more per channel will drive them. The R200 also makes a strong front pair in a Reserve home theater.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Reserve R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/lTJxF2ktLLk\" title=\"Cheap Bookshelf Speakers! Polk Audio Speakers POLK RESERVE R200 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the Reserve R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BzDClEAQsBU\" title=\"What You Need to Know Before Buying The Polk R200! - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Polk Audio","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981917937837,"sku":"NEW-POR200-BRN","price":799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/POR200_BRN_01-Large__74780.1731269643.1280.1280_7e342253-b6ab-4ede-8713-2d4b52940237.jpg?v=1778130981"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-gold-50-6g-bookshelf-speaker-satin-white-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Gold 50 6G Bookshelf Speaker - Satin White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Smallest Gold, and Why That Is the Point\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 50 6G is the compact two-way in Monitor Audio’s Gold Series 6G. One 6-inch HDT C-CAM mid-bass driver and one MPD III pleated tweeter share a cabinet just over a foot tall, crossing over at 2.5 kHz. It is the model in the range built for smaller rooms and real stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSmall does not mean entry-level here. The driver technology is the same HDT cone and MPD III tweeter used in the larger Gold models, and the build is the same. What you give up against a Gold 100 6G is bass extension and a dedicated midrange driver, not the quality of what remains.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHDT, and Why the Cones Are Hexagons\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHDT stands for Hexagonal Diaphragm Technology, Monitor Audio’s newest metal cone. In its own words, the cone \"employs a hexagonal pattern to disrupt symmetries in the cone breakup\", which is a precise way of saying the cone stays a piston for longer before it starts to ring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes 55 Hz to 60 kHz free-field at minus 6 dB, and 44 Hz to 60 kHz in-room. Sensitivity is 85 dB. Nominal impedance is 4 ohms, and the minimum is 4.0 ohms at 225 Hz, so the load stays close to its rating across the band.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe recommended amplifier is 130 to 300 watts into 4 ohms, and peak output is quoted at 114 dB. The rear HiVe II port is tuned to 50 Hz. Each cabinet measures 12.6 by 7.3 by 11.9 inches and weighs 18 pounds 12 ounces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMPD III, the Tweeter That Is Not a Dome\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe high frequencies come from a Micro Pleated Diaphragm rather than a dome. Monitor Audio says the latest MPD III \"delivers precise high-frequency sound with greater consistency, clarity and accuracy\". It is the same family of tweeter the company uses further up its range, including in the Gold 100 6G.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby reviewed the Gold 50 6G on video for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e on March 22, 2026, and came away impressed. He found that \"the precise diction around the vocals meant that lyrics were far easier to discern\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHe also highlighted a \"deeper, more forceful bass performance\" and \"a sense of rightness about the upper mid-range\". Those excerpts are as Monitor Audio published them from the review; the video is embedded below so you can hear his reasoning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want Gold Series sound in a smaller room\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is the compact model in the range, sized for rooms where a Gold 100 6G would be too much speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou already own, or plan to buy, a strong amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 4 ohms nominal and a 130 to 300 watt recommendation rule out small integrateds; one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e with real current is the match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to voices\u003c\/strong\u003e — Rigby’s point about \"precise diction around the vocals\" is what a pleated tweeter crossing at 2.5 kHz tends to deliver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou may add a subwoofer later\u003c\/strong\u003e — 44 Hz in-room is honest for the size, and a sub fills in the rest without asking the speaker to strain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are furnishing a mixed music and film room\u003c\/strong\u003e — 114 dB of peak output is more headroom than a compact box usually offers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on the back of each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet them on stands, bring the tweeter to ear height, and give the rear port room to breathe. Then angle them in toward your seat. A 4 ohm speaker also deserves a cable of sensible gauge for the length of the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Gold 50 6G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a rear-ported speaker at 18 pounds 12 ounces each belongs on a stand, not a shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 to 300 watts into 4 ohms, with current to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a low-loss run sized for a 4 ohm load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural partner below 44 Hz, for music or film\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I really need a big amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Monitor Audio rates the speaker at 4 ohms nominal and recommends 130 to 300 watts into that load. Sensitivity is a modest 85 dB, so a small amplifier will run out of headroom well before the speaker does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePhysically, yes: each cabinet is 12.6 inches tall, 7.3 wide and 11.9 deep. Acoustically, the rear port wants space behind it, so a stand a foot or more from the wall will sound better than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does it differ from the Gold 100 6G?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Gold 100 6G is a three-way with an 8-inch bass driver, a dedicated midrange and deeper bass. The Gold 50 6G is a two-way for smaller rooms. Both share the HDT cone and MPD III tweeter; the whole \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/monitor-audio-gold\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGold range\u003c\/a\u003e is here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is an MPD tweeter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA Micro Pleated Diaphragm: a folded, ribbon-like membrane rather than a dome. Monitor Audio’s third-generation version is here, the same design family as its dearer ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFor most music in a small or medium room, no. Monitor Audio quotes 44 Hz in-room at minus 6 dB. For film, or for organ and electronic bass, a subwoofer will add the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are there?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMacassar wood veneer, High-Gloss Black and Satin White. Monitor Audio covers the speakers with a five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby of The Audiophile Man reviews the Gold 50 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/qOBRstdgWCA\" title=\"Monitor Audio Gold 50 6G Review: Small Speakers, Serious Audiophile Performance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio introduces the Gold Series 6G:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/eAFKdUtPCE0\" title=\"A Contemporary Classic: Gold Series 6G\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about matching an amplifier to a 4 ohm load, choosing speaker stands, or adding a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45981920657581,"sku":"NEW-MRG6G50-WHT-PR","price":2749.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRG6G50-WHT-PR_01_angle_2024__38309.1731259188.1280.1280_c1154305-abdd-4bcc-a158-10d7fd585f34.jpg?v=1778157943"},{"product_id":"leak-sandwich-150-loudspeakers-walnut-pair","title":"LEAK Sandwich 150 Loudspeakers - Walnut - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe 1961 Sandwich Cone in a Two-Way\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Sandwich 150 is the mid-size model in LEAK's revived Sandwich range. A 6.5-inch mid-bass driver with an aluminum-skinned foam-core cone sits below a 1.2-inch coated textile dome tweeter. The cabinet is 16.3 inches tall, and the speakers are sold as a mirror-imaged pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK introduced the original Sandwich in 1961. Its cone bonded two aluminum skins to a foam core, an idea borrowed from aircraft construction, and it was far stiffer than the paper cones of the day. The new cone keeps that idea with a core of PMI structural foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Stiff Cone Matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA cone that flexes adds distortion. LEAK says the Sandwich cone moves as one piece across its range, free from mechanical break-up. The tweeter has a damped rear chamber that pulls its resonance below the 2.4 kHz crossover, so the two drivers blend without heavy correction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK quotes 44 Hz to 26 kHz within 3 dB, with bass extension to 38 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 86.5 dB and impedance is 6 ohms nominal with a 4 ohm minimum. LEAK recommends 25 to 150 watts, and peak output is rated at 106 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 9.8 inches wide, 16.3 tall on its plinth and 12.4 deep with terminals, and weighs 27 pounds. The finish is real walnut veneer with aluminum trim. A cloth grille and rubber feet are included, and the binding posts come with links fitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe cabinet is a sandwich too. An outer layer of MDF and an inner layer of high-density particle board are bonded with a damping glue. LEAK adds spot bracing and the front-to-back brace with the countersunk rear screw that marked the original.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby's June 6, 2024 review for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e concluded: \"One of the most exciting, rousing and dramatic speaker designs I've heard in some time, the Leak 150 speakers – for that price point – provide a sensational performance.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the treble: \"They excite, they wow, they will have you dancing around the room.\" Rigby found the grilles tamed the top end at very high volume, and preferred a little less toe-in with them off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Dewhirst reviewed them for \u003cem\u003eFuture Audiophile\u003c\/em\u003e on December 25, 2024: \"The LEAK Sandwich 150 bring a lot of bass for such a small bookshelf speaker.\" He also praised the seamless crossover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a lively, big-hearted sound\u003c\/strong\u003e — both reviewers heard bold bass and an open, energetic treble, not a polite one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want real bass from a standmount\u003c\/strong\u003e — 38 Hz extension from a 19.6-liter cabinet covers most music without a subwoofer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou love the 1960s look\u003c\/strong\u003e — walnut veneer, aluminum trim and the offset tweeter of the original, built by the company that made it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have, or want, a LEAK system\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-130-integrated-amplifier\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 130\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-230-integrated-amplifier-walnut\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 230\u003c\/a\u003e sit in the recommended power range and share the styling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want strict neutrality\u003c\/strong\u003e — Future Audiophile said \"they definitely have a sound\"; if you want a speaker with no character, this is not it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. Leave the terminal links in place for a normal single run. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter near ear height, away from the wall behind the rear port. LEAK's manual warns that placing them too close to a wall makes the bass boomy. Leave the grilles on. LEAK says they aid dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Sandwich 150 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-stereo-130-integrated-amplifier\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Stereo 130\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — LEAK's integrated amplifier with phono stage, DAC and Bluetooth, in matching walnut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-trustream-network-player\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK TruStream network player\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — streaming source in the same LEAK styling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 24 inches puts the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-sandwich-250-loudspeakers-walnut\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLEAK Sandwich 250\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the three-way step up, with an 11-inch woofer and a separate midrange\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Sandwich 150 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, mirror-imaged left and right, with grilles and rubber feet in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo they need stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK says they can sit on a sturdy shelf or side table, but stands are recommended for the best sound. Each speaker weighs 27 pounds, so choose a solid stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK recommends 25 to 150 watts. Sensitivity is 86.5 dB and the impedance dips to 4 ohms, so a good integrated amplifier of 40 watts or more is a comfortable match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is a sandwich cone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA cone built like an aircraft panel. Two thin aluminum skins are bonded to a light, stiff foam core. The result is far more rigid than a paper or plastic cone of the same weight, so it moves as one piece instead of flexing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eShould I use the grilles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. LEAK designed the grilles as part of the speaker and says driver dispersion is better with them on. Paul Rigby found they also soften the treble at very high volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the 150 compare with the Sandwich 100 and 250?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/leak-sandwich-100-loudspeakers-walnut-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSandwich 100\u003c\/a\u003e is a smaller two-way for compact rooms. The 250 is a much larger three-way. The 150 is the middle path, with real bass in a cabinet that still fits a normal stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby of The Audiophile Man reviews the Sandwich 150:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/ucPIKqAdQZc\" title=\"LEAK 150 Standmount Speakers Reviewed - The Audiophile Man\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLEAK introduces the Sandwich 150 and 250:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/C8D88mJyqts\" title=\"LEAK Sandwich 150 and 250 Loudspeaker - Leak HiFi Official\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"LEAK","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981927309485,"sku":"NEW-LESW150-WAL-PR","price":1595.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/LESW150-WAL-PR_01_angle_2024__00362.1730734201.1280.1280_e8a4f86c-b313-4277-a84f-feb3a3c03920.jpg?v=1778158581"},{"product_id":"focal-aria-evo-x-no-1-bookshelf-speaker-prime-walnut-pair","title":"Focal Aria Evo X No. 1 Bookshelf Speaker - Prime Walnut - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Flax Cone Aria, Made Compact\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Aria Evo X No. 1 is the standmount in Focal's refreshed Aria line. It pairs Focal's 1-inch aluminum-magnesium TAM inverted dome tweeter with a 6.5-inch Flax mid\/bass driver, in a cabinet a little over 15 inches tall with non-parallel side walls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Flax cone is Focal's signature: a layer of French flax fiber sandwiched between two thin sheets of glass fiber, built in Focal's own workshops. It is light for speed, stiff for bass and well damped for a neutral midrange, which is the character the Aria line is known for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat the TAM Tweeter and TMD Surround Add\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe TAM tweeter uses an M-shaped inverted dome for wider dispersion and finer detail. The mid\/bass driver's surround carries Focal's Tuned Mass Damper, small weights that stabilize the surround to keep the midrange clean at volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFocal quotes 55 Hz to 30 kHz within 3 dB, with the low end reaching 47 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 89.5 dB. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms with a 4.6 ohm minimum, and Focal recommends 25 to 120 watts. It is an easy speaker to drive well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 11 inches wide, 15.4 tall and 8.9 deep, and weighs 19 pounds. Four counter-spikes come pre-fitted for a shelf or stand, and Focal offers a dedicated stand as an option. The front panel has a leather-effect finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Methfessel reviewed the Aria Evo X No. 1 for \u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e on November 19, 2024: the speakers \"allow for relaxed listening and render music in a way that encourages sharing with others.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn integration: \"The bass response seamlessly integrates with the ever-present midrange.\" His caveat: \"if edgy, crisp, and definitive resolution evoke excitement, these may not be the right choice for you.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis summary: \"With a sound that's as smooth as butter and a gentle softening of sharp edges, these bookies leave for some relaxed listening.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen for voices\u003c\/strong\u003e — Methfessel kept returning to the vocal presence, and the Flax midrange is the reason people buy an Aria\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a smooth, long-session sound\u003c\/strong\u003e — the TAM tweeter is tuned for ease rather than bite, so bright recordings stay listenable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour room is small to medium\u003c\/strong\u003e — an office or a modest living room is what Focal designed it for, on a stand or a solid shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is modest but decent\u003c\/strong\u003e — 89.5 dB and 25 to 120 watts is a wide, forgiving window for any \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want crisp, etched detail and sharp transients\u003c\/strong\u003e — this is not that speaker; Methfessel says so plainly, and a brighter design will suit you better\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to a single pair of binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands or a sturdy shelf with the pre-fitted counter-spikes, a foot or more from the wall behind them, and toe them in slightly. Focal drivers loosen up over the first weeks, so judge the bass after some hours of playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Aria Evo X No. 1 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 25 to 120 watts into 8 ohms; a refined one matches the speaker's character\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — about 24 inches puts the tweeter at ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/focal-aria-evo-x-center-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFocal Aria Evo X Center\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center channel for a home theater front stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/music-streamers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMusic streamers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean source for a speaker this even-handed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Aria Evo X No. 1 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, with four counter-spikes already mounted on each cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFocal recommends 25 to 120 watts. Sensitivity is 89.5 dB, so even a modest amplifier plays them well. The 4.6 ohm minimum is nothing a decent integrated amplifier will notice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan they go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFocal says yes, on a stand or directly on furniture. They are 15.4 inches tall and 11 wide, so they need a generous shelf, and a foot of space behind them keeps the bass in balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The Aria Evo X No. 1 reaches 47 Hz at minus 6 dB, and the review found the bass well integrated. For film, a subwoofer adds the bottom octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack High Gloss, Prime Walnut and Moss Green High Gloss, each with a leather-effect front panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat changed from the earlier Aria 900 series?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Evo X generation keeps the Flax cone and adds the TAM tweeter, the TMD surround and a redesigned cabinet with non-parallel walls, in a more compact standmount than before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Absolute Sound reviews the Aria Evo X No. 1 on video:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/4LlFyYvB12U\" title=\"Best Bookshelf Speakers Series: Focal Aria Evo X No. 1 Review - The Absolute Sound\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMad Audio's review:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/06u-MIu1qy8\" title=\"Focal Aria Evo X No.1 Review - Mad Audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Focal","offers":[{"title":"New \/ Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981927964845,"sku":"NEW-FLAEXN1-WAL","price":2598.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/FLAEXN1_01_WAL_2024__41656.1731089843.1280.1280_e1277e82-e409-4c75-b644-4e64a0ceebef.jpg?v=1778149829"},{"product_id":"monitor-audio-bronze-50-7g-bookshelf-speakers-walnut-pair","title":"Monitor Audio Bronze 50 7G Bookshelf Speakers - Walnut - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Gold Dome, and a Front Baffle of Real Wood\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Bronze 50 7G is a two-way standmount, and a 6-inch C-CAM bass-mid driver does the heavy work. A 25 mm C-CAM Gold Dome tweeter takes over at 3.0 kHz, behind an aluminum grille patterned in small hexagons.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe front baffle is real wood veneered plywood. It is set slightly apart from the cabinet body, so you can see it is a separate piece. Each cabinet is 13.3 inches tall, 7.3 wide and 12.9 deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eC-CAM, and Why the Cone Is Metal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eC-CAM stands for Ceramic-Coated Aluminum Magnesium. Monitor Audio prefers metal cones because they are light but stiff. The cone moves more like a piston, and bends less as it travels. Less bending means less distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio quotes an in-room response of 41 Hz to 30 kHz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 86 dB. Nominal impedance is 8 ohms. The minimum is 4.0 ohms, at 200 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe recommendation is 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms. If your amplifier is rated into 4 ohms, that becomes 50 to 200 watts. Continuous power handling is 100 watts, and peak output is quoted at 112 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Ports Come With Foam Inserts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is ported at the back. Monitor Audio supplies foam inserts to rein the bass in. They help, but they are no substitute for space. These speakers reward being pulled out into the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eKashfia Kabir gave the Bronze 50 7G five stars for sound, build and compatibility in \u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e on September 25, 2025: \"Monitor Audio has done a terrific job with the new Bronze 50 7G standmounts.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the sound: \"For a speaker at this price level, the Bronze 7G are unusually precise and controlled.\" Her one caveat: they \"can sound a little uptight on occasion, but not so much that it becomes an issue\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby, reviewing for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e on December 17, 2025, heard \"a clean, clear and very exciting sound presentation that can easily detach you from your listening room and send you on a musical journey\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a speaker that grabs you\u003c\/strong\u003e — the character here is clear, fast and front-footed rather than polite, which is exactly what makes them hold your attention on the first track\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBass matters to you\u003c\/strong\u003e — Rigby’s verdict on the low end: \"And bass? For the price and size of the cabinets? Beautiful.\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou might bi-wire one day\u003c\/strong\u003e — each rear panel carries bi-wire terminals, so a single run works now and you can split the links later without changing speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is ordinary, not enormous\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB sensitivity and a 30 to 100 watt window into 8 ohms make these an easy match, and one of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e in that range will do nicely\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou can give them room to breathe\u003c\/strong\u003e — foam port inserts are supplied, but these sound best pulled away from the back wall, so a shelf pushed against plasterboard is the one placement to avoid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach rear panel carries bi-wire terminals. Leave the links in place and run a single cable from your amplifier for a conventional hookup, or take the links out and run separate cable to the treble and bass sections instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStart with the cabinets about 12 inches from the back wall, on stands, and leave the ports clear. Then move them by small amounts until the stereo image locks in. Keep both cable runs the same length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Bronze 50 7G owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Monitor Audio’s own ST-2 is the matching stand, and we stock it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms is the window\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — two runs per side if you decide to bi-wire\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for anything below the 41 Hz mark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Both rear panels carry bi-wire terminals. Remove the links and run separate cable to each pair, or feed them from separate amplifier channels if you would rather bi-amplify.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMonitor Audio recommends 30 to 100 watts into 8 ohms, or 50 to 200 watts into 4 ohms. At 86 dB sensitivity they are not fussy, and reviewers have found them easy to partner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo stands come with them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStands are separate. Monitor Audio makes the ST-2 specifically for standmounts of this size, and a stand suits these better than a shelf does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow far from the wall should they sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBegin around 12 inches out and adjust from there. The ports fire backwards, so crowding the wall thickens the bass. Use the supplied foam inserts only if you cannot find the space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow big and heavy are they?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures roughly 13.3 by 7.3 by 12.9 inches, and weighs 14 pounds 2 ounces. They ship as a pair, and Monitor Audio covers them for five years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the next range up add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/monitor-audio-silver-50-8g-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMonitor Audio Silver 50 8G\u003c\/a\u003e moves to the RST III cone, reaches 35 kHz, and puts four more pounds into each cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e spends ten minutes with a pair:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/_bwoLSCOmYY\" title=\"MONITOR AUDIO BRONZE 50 7G Review - Small Box, Big Sound\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJanine Elliot reviews them for \u003cem\u003eSound Advice\u003c\/em\u003e:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/mgEj5-u5JUM\" title=\"Monitor Audio Bronze 50 7G Stand-mount Stereo Speakers review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, bi-wiring, or matching an amplifier to your speakers? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Monitor Audio","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981952540845,"sku":"NEW-MRB7G50-WAL-PR","price":649.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Walnut \/ Demo","offer_id":45981952573613,"sku":"DEMO-MRB7G50-WAL-PR","price":649.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MRB7G50-WAL-PR_01_angle_pair_2025__49859.1755871741.1280.1280_4e2cd56f-72c0-47ec-964c-3cc1bbe5213d.jpg?v=1778163816"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-foundation-b1-bookshelf-speaker-walnut-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion Foundation B1 Bookshelf Speaker - Walnut - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMartinLogan's Most Affordable Folded Motion Speaker\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion Foundation B1 is the smallest and least expensive speaker MartinLogan makes with its Folded Motion tweeter. It pairs the Gen2 Folded Motion Tweeter S with a 5.5-inch aluminum-cone woofer in a rear-ported cabinet under 14 inches tall. It is sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFoundation is where MartinLogan's thin-film tweeter reaches its lowest price. The Tweeter S is a smaller version of the Folded Motion design: a pleated film diaphragm that squeezes air between its folds. It has 3.5 square inches of surface, still more than a 1-inch dome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Sounds Like a MartinLogan\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe folded film barely moves for a given output, which keeps the treble clean and quick. A waveguide controls dispersion to 90 degrees both ways. Below the 3,400 Hz crossover, the aluminum cone borrows its construction from the more expensive Motion series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 48 Hz to 23 kHz within 3 dB and 89 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 15 to 100 watts. Those numbers make the B1 one of the easiest speakers to drive in our store, and a natural partner for a receiver or a small streaming amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 7.25 inches wide, 13.7 tall and 9.5 deep, and weighs 11.5 pounds. Finishes are black with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim and satin white with silver trim. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. A removable grille covers the woofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChris Boylan reviewed the Foundation B1 for \u003cem\u003eecoustics\u003c\/em\u003e on August 30, 2025: \"What struck me most about the B1 is their airy transparency in the upper mids and treble regions.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis verdict: \"With excellent transparency and refined upper midrange and treble response, the B1s perform extremely well with acoustic, jazz and singer-songwriter fare and can easily keep up with the complexity of movie and TV soundtracks.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe caveat: \"While the low bass leaves something to be desired, an affordable powered subwoofer can bring these little gems to the next level of performance.\" He heard little below about 60 Hz in his room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a MartinLogan on the smallest budget\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Folded Motion tweeter in the least expensive cabinet the company makes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to voices and acoustic music\u003c\/strong\u003e — ecoustics heard the B1 at its best on singer-songwriter, jazz and acoustic material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Foundation home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the B1 works as a front pair in a small room or as surrounds behind the larger Foundation B2, with the matching \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a receiver or a streaming amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 89 dB sensitivity and 15 to 100 watts recommended means almost anything will drive it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-b2-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation B2\u003c\/a\u003e, which reaches 42 Hz with a 6.5-inch woofer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. The posts take banana plugs, spades or bare wire. There is one pair, so no bi-wiring. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, with several inches behind the rear port. Toe them in slightly toward the seat. If you add a subwoofer, cross over around 80 Hz and let the B1 do what it does best.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Foundation B1 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-foundation-10-powered-subwoofer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eDynamo Foundation 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the series subwoofer, and the upgrade ecoustics recommended first\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — puts the tweeter at ear height and bolts to the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural partner for a Foundation system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Foundation range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 15 to 100 watts. At 89 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, a receiver or a small integrated or streaming amplifier is plenty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFor casual listening, no. For full bass, yes. MartinLogan rates the B1 to 48 Hz, but ecoustics heard little below about 60 Hz and found a modest subwoofer transformed the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the B1 different from the Foundation B2?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe B2 has a 6.5-inch woofer, a larger cabinet and bass to 42 Hz. The B1 has a 5.5-inch woofer, reaches 48 Hz and is about an inch shorter and 3.5 pounds lighter. Both use the same tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan it go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. At 9.5 inches deep it fits a normal shelf. Leave a few inches behind the rear port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim, or satin white with silver trim. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan introduces the Motion Foundation series:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PeKgT3DbV6s\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Foundation Overview - MartinLogan Speakers\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAudible Elegance's first look at the Foundation B1 and B2:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Ly-y_Rqm35Q\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Foundation Speakers - Audible Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45981956767917,"sku":"NEW-MLMOFOB1-WAL","price":262.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOFOB1_WAL_02_2023__33528.1731102284.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778146460"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-foundation-b1-bookshelf-speaker-black-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion Foundation B1 Bookshelf Speaker - Black - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMartinLogan's Most Affordable Folded Motion Speaker\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion Foundation B1 is the smallest and least expensive speaker MartinLogan makes with its Folded Motion tweeter. It pairs the Gen2 Folded Motion Tweeter S with a 5.5-inch aluminum-cone woofer in a rear-ported cabinet under 14 inches tall. It is sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFoundation is where MartinLogan's thin-film tweeter reaches its lowest price. The Tweeter S is a smaller version of the Folded Motion design: a pleated film diaphragm that squeezes air between its folds. It has 3.5 square inches of surface, still more than a 1-inch dome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Sounds Like a MartinLogan\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe folded film barely moves for a given output, which keeps the treble clean and quick. A waveguide controls dispersion to 90 degrees both ways. Below the 3,400 Hz crossover, the aluminum cone borrows its construction from the more expensive Motion series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 48 Hz to 23 kHz within 3 dB and 89 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 15 to 100 watts. Those numbers make the B1 one of the easiest speakers to drive in our store, and a natural partner for a receiver or a small streaming amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 7.25 inches wide, 13.7 tall and 9.5 deep, and weighs 11.5 pounds. Finishes are black with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim and satin white with silver trim. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. A removable grille covers the woofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChris Boylan reviewed the Foundation B1 for \u003cem\u003eecoustics\u003c\/em\u003e on August 30, 2025: \"What struck me most about the B1 is their airy transparency in the upper mids and treble regions.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHis verdict: \"With excellent transparency and refined upper midrange and treble response, the B1s perform extremely well with acoustic, jazz and singer-songwriter fare and can easily keep up with the complexity of movie and TV soundtracks.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe caveat: \"While the low bass leaves something to be desired, an affordable powered subwoofer can bring these little gems to the next level of performance.\" He heard little below about 60 Hz in his room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a MartinLogan on the smallest budget\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Folded Motion tweeter in the least expensive cabinet the company makes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou listen to voices and acoustic music\u003c\/strong\u003e — ecoustics heard the B1 at its best on singer-songwriter, jazz and acoustic material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Foundation home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the B1 works as a front pair in a small room or as surrounds behind the larger Foundation B2, with the matching \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a receiver or a streaming amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 89 dB sensitivity and 15 to 100 watts recommended means almost anything will drive it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-b2-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation B2\u003c\/a\u003e, which reaches 42 Hz with a 6.5-inch woofer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. The posts take banana plugs, spades or bare wire. There is one pair, so no bi-wiring. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, with several inches behind the rear port. Toe them in slightly toward the seat. If you add a subwoofer, cross over around 80 Hz and let the B1 do what it does best.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Foundation B1 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-foundation-10-powered-subwoofer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eDynamo Foundation 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the series subwoofer, and the upgrade ecoustics recommended first\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — puts the tweeter at ear height and bolts to the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural partner for a Foundation system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Foundation range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 15 to 100 watts. At 89 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, a receiver or a small integrated or streaming amplifier is plenty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFor casual listening, no. For full bass, yes. MartinLogan rates the B1 to 48 Hz, but ecoustics heard little below about 60 Hz and found a modest subwoofer transformed the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the B1 different from the Foundation B2?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe B2 has a 6.5-inch woofer, a larger cabinet and bass to 42 Hz. The B1 has a 5.5-inch woofer, reaches 48 Hz and is about an inch shorter and 3.5 pounds lighter. Both use the same tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan it go on a bookshelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. At 9.5 inches deep it fits a normal shelf. Leave a few inches behind the rear port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim, or satin white with silver trim. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan introduces the Motion Foundation series:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PeKgT3DbV6s\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Foundation Overview - MartinLogan Speakers\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAudible Elegance's first look at the Foundation B1 and B2:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Ly-y_Rqm35Q\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Foundation Speakers - Audible Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45981957488813,"sku":"NEW-MLMOFOB1-BLK","price":262.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOFOB1_BLK_02_2023__79219.1731101709.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778146931"},{"product_id":"dali-sonik-3-bookshelf-speakers-white-pair","title":"DALI SONIK 3 Bookshelf Speakers - White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA 7-Inch Woofer in a Bookshelf Cabinet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Sonik 3 is the larger of the two standmounts in DALI’s Sonik series. It puts a full 7-inch Clarity Cone woofer under the same 29 mm soft dome tweeter as the rest of the range, crossing over at 2,300 Hz. The cabinet is 13.7 inches tall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI’s pitch is \"monitor-level coherence and precision with the richness of a larger speaker\", and the first full review broadly agrees. A 7-inch driver moves more air than the 5-inch units most rivals use at this size, and that shows up as scale and headroom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eClarity Cone, and What the Wood Is For\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI mixes fine paper pulp with wood fibers. The fibers leave the cone surface deliberately uneven, which breaks up resonances in the cone itself, and the mix stays light and stiff at the same time. The payoff is a cleaner upper midrange and an easier handover to the tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI quotes 47 Hz to 26 kHz within 3 dB. Sensitivity is 87 dB, nominal impedance is 6 ohms, and the recommended amplifier is 25 to 150 watts. Peak output is 108 dB, with the rear port tuned to 46 Hz. That is a friendly load with real headroom to spare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 13.7 by 7.8 by 12.1 inches and weighs just over 14 pounds with its grille. DALI recommends 2 to 20 inches from the wall behind. There is no built-in wall bracket on this model; it is made for a stand or a deep shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSMC, the Magnet That Cuts Distortion\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI’s patented Soft Magnetic Composite sits in the woofer’s pole piece, where it reduces the eddy currents and hysteresis that add distortion to an ordinary iron motor. DALI says the result is \"cleaner, more detailed and relaxed midrange performance\". It is the same idea used in its dearest speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the Sonik 3 on February 2, 2026, and found that \"These may be small boxes but they play loudly, and cleanly.\" The reviewer also praised \"an audibly seamless crossover from tweeter to woofer\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe verdict: \"The overall performance, matched with a highly competitive price, assures the Sonik 3 of a hearty recommendation\". One practical note from the same review: they sounded best fired straight ahead, not angled in toward the seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Are These Bookshelf Speakers Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want bookshelf size with more bass than usual\u003c\/strong\u003e — 47 Hz and a 7-inch woofer put this closer to a small floorstander than to most standmounts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou play it loud\u003c\/strong\u003e — 108 dB of peak output, and \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e found the big driver stayed clean when pushed hard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVoices matter\u003c\/strong\u003e — \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e: \"I was moved by the clarity of voices, be it from speech or sung vocals, both male and female.\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want amplifier flexibility\u003c\/strong\u003e — 87 dB into 6 ohms with a 25 to 150 watt range works with most \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and receivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFilm as well as music\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same reviewer found they \"worked very well either side of a large screen\", and DALI makes matching center and on-wall models\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to a single pair of binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black, with both runs the same length. The posts take banana plugs, spades or bare wire. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power or configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePoint them straight ahead rather than toward your seat, and give the rear port a few inches. \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e found the treble smoothed out and the bass tightened once the toe-in was removed and the speakers moved off the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Sonik 3 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 pounds and 12 inches deep is a stand-mount, not a shelf speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 25 to 150 watts into 6 ohms\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — one run per side, terminated or bare\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional at 47 Hz, but there for film\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the Sonik 3 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers, with two magnetic grilles and rubber pads in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI recommends 25 to 150 watts into 6 ohms. At 87 dB these are among the easier speakers to drive at the price, and they will take a serious amplifier without complaint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eStand or shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA stand, ideally. The cabinet is 12.1 inches deep with a large rear port, so a bookcase will crowd it. DALI rates them from 2 inches off the wall, which a deep shelf or media unit can manage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does DALI say not to angle them in?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI designs its drivers for wide dispersion, so the balance is right when the speakers face straight ahead. Toe them in and the treble comes forward, which is what \u003cem\u003eThe Ear\u003c\/em\u003e heard until the angle was removed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs there a step up from here?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWithin DALI, the Danish-built Opticon Mk2 standmounts sit above the Sonik range. You will find them in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/dali\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eDALI collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. With 47 Hz in a 7-inch driver, the Sonik 3 gives most recordings a solid foundation on its own. Add one for film or the lowest electronic bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDALI introduces the Sonik series:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/2kIaGd4EZNY\" title=\"Introducing DALI SONIK\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTechX compares the Sonik 3 with its smaller sibling (English captions available):\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/v4vmAlK-fOk\" title=\"DALI Sonik 1 vs Sonik 3 | Compact or Complete?\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, choosing stands, or matching an amplifier to your speakers? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"DALI","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45981997957293,"sku":"NEW-DASONIK3-WHT-PR","price":1200.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/DASONIK3-WHT-PR_01_angle_2026__08520.1772217698.1280.1280_be010d35-3ebd-4be8-8e61-276f69b2ce24.jpg?v=1778166330"},{"product_id":"mission-m700-bookshelf-speakers-with-stands-black-pair","title":"Mission M700 Bookshelf Speakers with Stands - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe 1980 Benchmark, Rebuilt With Stands Included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Mission 700 is a two-way standmount with a 6.5-inch mineral-loaded polypropylene woofer and a 1.25-inch soft dome tweeter, mounted tweeter-below-woofer in Mission's inverted layout. The cabinet is 20 inches tall and holds 24.8 liters. This listing includes Mission's matching stands, and the speakers are sold as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe original 700 of 1980 put Mission's inverted driver layout on the map. Placing the tweeter below the woofer evens the path lengths to a seated listener, which improves time alignment. The new 700 keeps the white baffle and the logo, but its drivers, crossover and cabinet are new designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Sounds Bigger Than Most Standmounts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA 24.8-liter cabinet is large for a two-way, and it lets the 6.5-inch driver reach 45 Hz. The cabinet is a sandwich of two woods bonded with damping adhesive, braced and lined with foam and long-hair fiber. The crossover sits at 3 kHz on separate bass and treble boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission quotes 45 Hz to 20 kHz within 3 dB, with bass extension to 38 Hz at minus 6 dB. Sensitivity is 86 dB, impedance 8 ohms nominal with a 5.2 ohm minimum. Recommended power is 25 to 150 watts, and peak output is rated at 106 dB.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 10.2 inches wide, 20.1 tall and 11.5 deep with terminals, and weighs 28 pounds. The included stand is 19 inches tall on its spikes, with a 12.6 by 13 inch base, and weighs 14 pounds. Finishes are walnut or black real-wood veneer with the white baffle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the 700 on October 2, 2022: \"These boxes sound impressively big and authoritative.\" A 2025 update kept the rating but noted \"they lack the subtlety and finesse of class leaders.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEd Selley, \u003cem\u003eAVForums\u003c\/em\u003e, October 13, 2022: \"if it's 'drive' and 'attack' you value, the Mission 700 will be just the ticket.\" His caution: a bright amplifier could deliver \"rather too much of a good thing.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDavid Price of \u003cem\u003eStereoNET\u003c\/em\u003e, April 18, 2023, called it \"a lively character who just wants to go out and party.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a big, bold, forward sound\u003c\/strong\u003e — three reviewers heard scale, drive and attack; this is not a polite speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — 38 Hz extension from a 24.8-liter cabinet covers nearly all music\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want stands sorted\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching Mission stands are in this package, sized to the cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is smooth rather than bright\u003c\/strong\u003e — AVForums warned that a treble-happy amplifier is too much of a good thing here\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the most refined version of the idea\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-m770-speakers-with-stands-walnut-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 770\u003c\/a\u003e adds an 8-inch driver, a 38.5-liter cabinet and the reviews to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power. At 86 dB sensitivity, an integrated amplifier of 50 watts or more is a comfortable match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAssemble the stands, place the speakers about three feet from the wall behind them and well clear of the sides, and angle them in toward the seat. What Hi-Fi? found toe-in improved focus and image solidity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Mission 700 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-778x-integrated-amplifier-silver\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 778X integrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Mission's own integrated amplifier, styled to match\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth-sounding 50 to 100 watt amplifier suits the 700's lively treble\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a quality single run for each speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — optional for film; the 700 covers music on its own\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the stands included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. This listing is the pair of speakers with the matching Mission 700 stands in the same finish. Check the title for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMission recommends 25 to 150 watts. At 86 dB sensitivity, a 50 watt integrated amplifier is a good starting point. Choose one with a smooth top end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy is the tweeter below the woofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt evens the distance from each driver to a seated listener, which improves time alignment and imaging. Mission has used the layout since the original 700.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The 700 reaches 38 Hz at minus 6 dB. For film, a subwoofer adds the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the 700 different from the Mission 750 and 770?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/mission-m750-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMission 750\u003c\/a\u003e is the compact model with a 5.25-inch driver and no stands. The 770 is the flagship with an 8-inch driver and a 38.5-liter cabinet. The 700 sits in the middle with a 6.5-inch driver and stands included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow tall is the speaker on its stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 19 inches tall on its spikes and the cabinet is 20 inches, so the tweeter lands near seated ear height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Mission 700:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/HefaECw7_WA\" title=\"SAVE or SPLURGE on Mission Speakers? MISSION 700 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHi-Fi Riff on the reimagined Mission 700:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/v8yMeieDm4k\" title=\"A Kick Up the Eighties - Mission's Classic 700 Standmounter Reimagined - Hi-Fi Riff\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Mission","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45982010015917,"sku":"NEW-MNM700-BLK","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MNM700_BLK_01_2024__42506.1731172019.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778134768"},{"product_id":"cambridge-audio-minx-min-12-satellite-speaker-white-each","title":"Cambridge Audio Minx Min 12 Satellite Speaker - White - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThree Inches Square, One Driver, Wide Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Minx Min 12 is Cambridge Audio's smallest satellite, a 3.1-inch cube built around a single 2.25-inch Balanced Mode Radiator. The BMR moves like a cone at low frequencies and flexes like a flat panel higher up, so one driver covers the range with unusually wide dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is sold one speaker at a time in a high-gloss lacquer finish, so a stereo pair, a center channel or a five-speaker surround set costs exactly what it should. Cambridge designed the Min 12 to run with a subwoofer, and its compact Minx X201 is the natural partner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Fits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBuy two for a desk or a small den, one to sit under a TV, or several for surrounds. The same speaker in every position keeps the tonal character consistent all the way around the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCambridge quotes 150 Hz to 20 kHz, 86 dB sensitivity at 2.83 volts and an 8 ohm impedance, with 25 to 200 watts recommended. An entry-level integrated amplifier or any AV receiver is enough, and the 150 Hz floor is why a subwoofer belongs in the plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Little Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe cabinet measures 3.1 inches wide, 3.1 tall and 3.3 deep, and weighs under a pound. A standard 3\/8-inch threaded insert on the back takes Cambridge's Minx wall mounts and stands, so it can go almost anywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have almost no space\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 3-inch cube under a pound fits a desk, a shelf, a windowsill or a wall bracket where nothing else will\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building surround sound in stages\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold individually, so you can add one \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/rear-and-surround-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003esurround speaker\u003c\/a\u003e at a time and end with a set voiced to match itself\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a discreet TV or desktop system\u003c\/strong\u003e — two Min 12s and a small subwoofer make a 2.1 setup that hides in plain sight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is an ordinary one\u003c\/strong\u003e — 86 dB and 8 ohms with a 25 to 200 watt window suits any of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e or receivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan on a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — 150 Hz is the floor, so a \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003esubwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e is not optional for music or film; this is a satellite, not a full-range bookshelf speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Does It Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Min 12 is passive. Speaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the binding posts on the back, and the posts pull out to accept 4 mm banana plugs if you prefer them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSit it on a shelf or thread it onto a Minx mount, and aim each speaker roughly at the seating area. With a subwoofer, set the crossover near 150 Hz, which is where the Min 12 rolls off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Min 12 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/cambridge-audio-minx-x201-subwoofer\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCambridge Audio Minx X201 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Minx sub built to carry everything below 150 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/cambridge-audio-minx-400m-wall-mounts-gloss-white-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCambridge Audio Minx 400M wall mounts\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — Cambridge's own pivoting brackets, sold as a pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 25 to 200 watts into 8 ohms is the window, and Cambridge's AXA35 sits inside it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — more runs than usual in a surround set, so buy accordingly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs this one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. Order two for stereo, or as many as your surround layout calls for. We list it this way because Cambridge sells it one to a box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use it as a center channel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. A cube has no wrong way up, so the same Min 12 works as a front, a center or a surround, and every position shares one voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The Min 12 reaches 150 Hz, which leaves all of the bass to a subwoofer. Cambridge designed the Minx range around that split, and the X201 is its matching sub.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat amplifier power does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCambridge recommends 25 to 200 watts into 8 ohms. Sensitivity is 86 dB, so a 35 watt integrated amplifier or a mid-size receiver will drive a set comfortably at normal levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I wall mount it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The back carries a standard 3\/8-inch threaded insert, and Cambridge's Minx 400M pivoting wall mounts are made for it. Table stands and floor stands are also available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the Min 12 different from the MSX20?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/cambridge-audio-minx-msx20-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMSX20\u003c\/a\u003e is Cambridge's newer, taller satellite. It adds a second driver for bass and reaches 120 Hz instead of 150 Hz, at a modest step up in cost per speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTheMazCorner gives a ten-minute owner review of the Min 12:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/gS6KiTbeZGA\" title=\"Review of Cambridge Audio of Minx Min 12\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA ninety-second retailer tour of the Minx Min satellites:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/TMAh_xSfrYA\" title=\"Cambridge Audio Minx Min satellite speakers\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about satellite speakers, subwoofer crossover settings, or building a home theater in stages? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Cambridge Audio","offers":[{"title":"White \/ New","offer_id":45982012014765,"sku":"NEW-CAMIMIN12-EAWHT-SIN","price":99.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/camimin12_wht2-large__77627.1730959124.1280.1280_37e4eae7-1b6a-4a40-9a29-d78bd80fee38.jpg?v=1778134622"},{"product_id":"martinlogan-motion-foundation-b2-bookshelf-speaker-satin-white-each","title":"MartinLogan Motion Foundation B2 Bookshelf Speaker - Satin White - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Largest Foundation Bookshelf, With the Folded Motion Tweeter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Motion Foundation B2 is the bigger of two bookshelf speakers in MartinLogan's entry Foundation series. It pairs the Gen2 Folded Motion Tweeter S with a 6.5-inch aluminum-cone woofer in a rear-ported cabinet 15 inches tall. It is sold by the each, so order two for stereo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFoundation is where MartinLogan's thin-film tweeter reaches its lowest price. The Tweeter S is a smaller version of the Folded Motion design: a pleated film diaphragm that squeezes air between its folds. It has 3.5 square inches of surface, still more than a 1-inch dome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Sounds Like a MartinLogan\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe folded film barely moves for a given output, which keeps the treble clean and quick. A waveguide controls dispersion to 90 degrees both ways. Below the 3,800 Hz crossover, the aluminum cone borrows its construction from the more expensive Motion series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan quotes 42 Hz to 23 kHz within 3 dB and 90 dB sensitivity. Impedance is 5 ohms. Recommended power is 15 to 100 watts. That 42 Hz figure is the deepest bass in the Foundation series, and deeper than many bookshelf speakers at twice the size of this budget.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet is 7.75 inches wide, 15 tall and 11.5 deep, and weighs 15 pounds. Finishes are black with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim and satin white with silver trim. A single pair of 5-way binding posts sits on the back. A removable grille covers the woofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA full written review of the B2 had not been published when we wrote this page. AV-Obsessed reviewed it on video in October 2024, embedded below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eAudioholics\u003c\/em\u003e previewed the Foundation series in August 2023 and noted that the B2 \"promises bass response down to 42Hz\" from a cabinet standing 15 inches tall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a MartinLogan on a tight budget\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Folded Motion tweeter at the lowest price the company offers it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want real bass from a bookshelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — 42 Hz from a 6.5-inch woofer covers nearly all music without a subwoofer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Foundation home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center\u003c\/a\u003e and the smaller Foundation B1 as surrounds share the tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a receiver or small amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e — 90 dB sensitivity and 15 to 100 watts recommended means almost anything will drive it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the bigger tweeter and a step up in finish\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-b10-bookshelf-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMotion B10\u003c\/a\u003e moves to the full-size Gen2 Obsidian tweeter and a woven fiberglass woofer in a smaller cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier to the binding posts on each cabinet, red to red and black to black. The posts take banana plugs, spades or bare wire. There is one pair, so no bi-wiring. These are passive speakers, so there is nothing else to power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePut them on stands with the tweeter at seated ear height, with several inches behind the rear port. Toe them in slightly toward the seat. The B2 also bolts to the STAND25 stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most Foundation B2 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-stand25-speaker-stand-27-inch-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMartinLogan STAND25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — puts the tweeter at ear height and bolts to the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-motion-foundation-c1-center-channel-speaker\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFoundation C1 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the matching center\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/martinlogan-dynamo-foundation-10-powered-subwoofer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eDynamo Foundation 10 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the series subwoofer, for film and the last octave\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural partner for a Foundation system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the price for one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. MartinLogan sells the Foundation range by the each. Order two for stereo, or add singles as surround channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan recommends 15 to 100 watts. At 90 dB sensitivity and 5 ohms, a receiver or a small integrated amplifier is plenty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the B2 different from the Foundation B1?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe B2 has a 6.5-inch woofer, a larger cabinet and bass to 42 Hz. The B1 has a 5.5-inch woofer, reaches 48 Hz and is about an inch shorter. Both use the same tweeter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for music. The B2 reaches 42 Hz, lower than almost anything on a record. For film, a subwoofer adds the last octave.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I bi-wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Foundation B2 has a single pair of 5-way binding posts, so a single run of cable is the only option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack with gunmetal trim, walnut with bronze trim, or satin white with silver trim. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAV-Obsessed reviews the Motion Foundation B2:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/flPNVlkBcTw\" title=\"Martin Logan Motion Foundation B2 Bookshelf Speakers Review - AV-Obsessed\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMartinLogan introduces the Motion Foundation series:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PeKgT3DbV6s\" title=\"MartinLogan Motion Foundation Overview - MartinLogan Speakers\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"MartinLogan","offers":[{"title":"Satin White \/ New","offer_id":45982098325677,"sku":"NEW-MLMOFOB2-SATWHT","price":337.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/MLMOFOB2_SATWHT_01_2023__21358.1731168875.1280.1280_fc8aca25-853f-4c4a-8aad-c93fb91313e3.jpg?v=1778146389"},{"product_id":"golden-ear-supersat-3-satellite-speaker-gloss-black-each","title":"Golden Ear SuperSat 3 Satellite Speaker - Gloss Black - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eUnder Three Inches Deep, With a Ribbon Tweeter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe SuperSat 3 is GoldenEar's slim satellite: a 12.6-inch cabinet only 2.8 inches deep, built to sit on a shelf, hang on a wall or stand beside a TV. It carries GoldenEar's High-Velocity Folded Ribbon tweeter between two 4.5-inch cast-basket mid\/bass drivers. It is sold one speaker at a time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe cabinet is molded from a marble-powder-infused polymer for stiffness and low resonance, and finished in piano gloss black. A table stand comes in the box, and the back carries a keyhole slot and a threaded insert for GoldenEar's SuperSwivel wall bracket.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy the Tweeter Matters in a Satellite\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe HVFR is the same air-motion transformer design GoldenEar puts in its Triton towers. In a satellite it means wide dispersion and a clean top end, so surrounds and fronts share one voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGoldenEar quotes 90 Hz to 25 kHz typical, with the bass at minus 6 dB at 180 Hz anechoic. Sensitivity is 91 dB at 2.83 volts into a 4 ohm nominal load, and recommended amplification is 20 to 200 watts. A subwoofer is part of the design, not an option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Little Room It Takes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach speaker is 12.6 inches tall, 4.75 wide and 2.8 deep, and weighs 5 pounds. Turned on its side it becomes a low center-channel shape, though GoldenEar also makes a dedicated horizontal 3C version with an angled foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want speakers that vanish\u003c\/strong\u003e — under three inches deep and five pounds, it hangs on a wall like a picture frame or sits on the included stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a surround system in stages\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold individually, so you can add one \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/rear-and-surround-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003esurround speaker\u003c\/a\u003e at a time and end with a set that matches itself\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a real tweeter in a satellite\u003c\/strong\u003e — the folded ribbon is the same type GoldenEar uses in its towers, not a small dome\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier is an ordinary receiver\u003c\/strong\u003e — 91 dB sensitivity means any of our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e will drive a full set, as long as it is happy with 4 ohms\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan on a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — 180 Hz at minus 6 dB is a satellite's floor; GoldenEar crosses the SuperSat 3 to a \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003esubwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e at 120 Hz, and so should you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Does It Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your receiver to a single pair of binding posts on the back of each speaker. It is passive, so there is nothing else to power or configure. Buy two for stereo, or five for surround.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn a shelf, screw the included table stand to the keyhole. On a wall, use the keyhole or the threaded insert with a SuperSwivel bracket, and use a safety strap. Set your receiver's crossover for these channels to 120 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat finishes the setup. These are the categories most SuperSat 3 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/golden-ear-forcefield-30-8-inch-ultra-compact-high-output-subwoofer-matte-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGoldenEar ForceField 30 subwoofer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the compact 8-inch sub that carries everything below 120 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/goldenear-super-swivel-wall-mount-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGoldenEar Super Swivel wall mounts\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the pivoting brackets made for the threaded insert on the back\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/home-theater-receivers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAV receivers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — 20 to 200 watts, rated into 4 ohms\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — more runs than usual in a surround set, so buy accordingly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs this one speaker or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker. Order two for stereo, or as many as your surround layout calls for. We list it this way because GoldenEar ships it one to a box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use it as a center channel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLaid on its side, yes. GoldenEar also makes the SuperSat 3C, a horizontal version with an adjustable angling foot, for a dedicated center.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The SuperSat 3 reaches 180 Hz at minus 6 dB, so all of the bass belongs to a subwoofer. GoldenEar's own systems cross it over at 120 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much amplifier does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGoldenEar rates it for 20 to 200 watts at 91 dB sensitivity into 4 ohms. Any AV receiver will drive a set; check that yours is rated for 4 ohm speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat comes in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne speaker, one table stand with its square-neck insert and screw, and the manual. Wall brackets and floor stands are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does it differ from the Aon 3?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/goldenear-aon-3-bookshelf-speaker-piano-black-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAon 3\u003c\/a\u003e is a full bookshelf speaker with a 7-inch driver and side radiators that reaches into the 40s on its own. The SuperSat 3 is a wall-thin satellite that needs a subwoofer, in exchange for disappearing into the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn owner unboxes a GoldenEar SuperCinema system that includes SuperSat 3 surrounds:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/89AHeyhnruM\" title=\"GoldenEar SuperCinema 60 SuperSat 60 SuperSat 3 Forcefield 5 Unboxing\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn owner's GoldenEar satellite home theater setup:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BtFuwv2bZWQ\" title=\"Goldenear technology Satellite systems Onkyo home theater setup\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Golden Ear","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982123950253,"sku":"NEW-GESS3-GLSBLK-EA","price":299.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/GESS3-GLSBLK-EA_01_angle_2025__25500.1767196183.1280.1280_d191d0a8-2de0-4d9d-a99f-2542574b19f9.jpg?v=1778165814"},{"product_id":"polk-audio-reserve-r200-bookshelf-speakers-black-pair","title":"Polk Audio Reserve R200 Bookshelf Speakers - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Larger Reserve Bookshelf, With a 6.5-Inch Woofer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Reserve R200 is the bigger of Polk Audio's two Reserve bookshelf speakers. It pairs the 1-inch Pinnacle ring radiator tweeter from Polk's flagship Legend series with a 6.5-inch Turbine Cone woofer, in a cabinet just over 14 inches tall. The speakers are sold as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk launched the Reserve series in 2021 as the step below Legend, and gave every model the same tweeter and cone design. The R200 is the Reserve speaker for listeners who want real bass from a standmount without moving up to a floorstander.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Drivers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tweeter has a pointed center plug and a waveguide that Polk says widens the sweet spot. The woofer uses a molded foam-core cone with a turbine pattern for stiffness without added mass, and it crosses over to the tweeter at 3,000 Hz. Grilles are magnetic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk quotes an overall response of 39 Hz to 50 kHz, with the minus 3 dB limits at 51 Hz and 38 kHz. Sensitivity is 86 dB at 2.83 volts. The minimum impedance is 3.8 ohms, and the recommended amplifier power is 30 to 200 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe impedance dip means the R200 wants an amplifier or receiver that is rated for 4-ohm speakers. Polk lists it as compatible with 8, 6 and 4 ohm outputs. Sound+Image found the speakers relish being turned up and driven with quality power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize, Port and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 7.5 inches wide, 14.1 tall and 13.9 deep including the feet, and weighs 19.1 pounds. The rear X-Port uses closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet to cancel port resonance. Audio Advisor stocks black, white and brown. The Reserve series carries Polk's five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e published \u003cem\u003eSound+Image\u003c\/em\u003e's review in September 2021: \"The R200 proved truthful at both low levels and high, able to deliver a solid bass and a remarkable clarity of midrange\" that the reviewers credited partly to the X-Port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe reviewers did not learn the price until the end. \"We'd have put them at least double the actual price,\" they wrote, and called the R200 a bargain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e named the R200 a 2021 Stand-Mount Loudspeaker of the Year. Reviewer Neil Gader wrote: \"the R200 cuts right to the heart of the music by outputting tunes and tones with equal measures of accuracy, dynamism, and immediacy.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want standmount bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 6.5-inch woofer and 39 Hz overall response are as deep as the Reserve bookshelves go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a forward, lively presentation\u003c\/strong\u003e — The Absolute Sound described a monitor-style sound with warmth in the midrange\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Reserve home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the R200 matches the R400 center and R900 height modules for a consistent voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a medium or large room\u003c\/strong\u003e — Sound+Image found the R200 rewards being turned up and driven with quality power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a smaller cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r100-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eReserve R100\u003c\/a\u003e is 1.3 inches shorter and 7 pounds lighter, with the same tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the dual binding posts on each speaker, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so nothing plugs into the wall. Polk recommends 30 to 200 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands with the tweeter near ear height. Sound+Image found the imaging best from a seat dead center between the speakers, and heard uniform response across a wide sweet spot. Leave room behind the cabinet for the rear port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most R200 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r400-center-channel-speaker-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R400 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest Reserve center, with the same drivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r900-height-module\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R900 height module\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sits on top of a Reserve speaker for Dolby Atmos height channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — choose one rated for 4-ohm speakers with 50 watts or more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the last half octave below 51 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the R200 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with magnetic grilles. Audio Advisor stocks black, white and brown. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much power do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk recommends 30 to 200 watts per channel. Because the impedance dips to 3.8 ohms, choose an amplifier or receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. Polk quotes 39 Hz overall and 51 Hz at minus 3 dB, and Sound+Image heard solid bass. For film or deep electronic bass, add a subwoofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the X-Port?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear port with closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet's internal resonance. Polk says it keeps the bass output of a port while cancelling the resonances a plain port adds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the R200 different from the R100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe R200 has a 6.5-inch woofer instead of 5.25, reaches 39 Hz instead of 44, handles 200 watts instead of 150, and weighs 19.1 pounds each instead of 12.2.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they work with a receiver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Any receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers with 30 watts or more per channel will drive them. The R200 also makes a strong front pair in a Reserve home theater.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Reserve R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/lTJxF2ktLLk\" title=\"Cheap Bookshelf Speakers! Polk Audio Speakers POLK RESERVE R200 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the Reserve R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BzDClEAQsBU\" title=\"What You Need to Know Before Buying The Polk R200! - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Polk Audio","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982124507309,"sku":"NEW-POR200-BLK","price":799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/POR200_BLK_01-Large__13403.1731268987.1280.1280_331a94b9-6f4e-44a7-996e-ff7eb11a8334.jpg?v=1778135228"},{"product_id":"polk-audio-reserve-r200-bookshelf-speakers-white-pair","title":"Polk Audio Reserve R200 Bookshelf Speakers - White - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Larger Reserve Bookshelf, With a 6.5-Inch Woofer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Reserve R200 is the bigger of Polk Audio's two Reserve bookshelf speakers. It pairs the 1-inch Pinnacle ring radiator tweeter from Polk's flagship Legend series with a 6.5-inch Turbine Cone woofer, in a cabinet just over 14 inches tall. The speakers are sold as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk launched the Reserve series in 2021 as the step below Legend, and gave every model the same tweeter and cone design. The R200 is the Reserve speaker for listeners who want real bass from a standmount without moving up to a floorstander.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Drivers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tweeter has a pointed center plug and a waveguide that Polk says widens the sweet spot. The woofer uses a molded foam-core cone with a turbine pattern for stiffness without added mass, and it crosses over to the tweeter at 3,000 Hz. Grilles are magnetic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Numbers, and What They Ask of You\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk quotes an overall response of 39 Hz to 50 kHz, with the minus 3 dB limits at 51 Hz and 38 kHz. Sensitivity is 86 dB at 2.83 volts. The minimum impedance is 3.8 ohms, and the recommended amplifier power is 30 to 200 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe impedance dip means the R200 wants an amplifier or receiver that is rated for 4-ohm speakers. Polk lists it as compatible with 8, 6 and 4 ohm outputs. Sound+Image found the speakers relish being turned up and driven with quality power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize, Port and Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach cabinet measures 7.5 inches wide, 14.1 tall and 13.9 deep including the feet, and weighs 19.1 pounds. The rear X-Port uses closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet to cancel port resonance. Audio Advisor stocks black, white and brown. The Reserve series carries Polk's five-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWhat Hi-Fi?\u003c\/em\u003e published \u003cem\u003eSound+Image\u003c\/em\u003e's review in September 2021: \"The R200 proved truthful at both low levels and high, able to deliver a solid bass and a remarkable clarity of midrange\" that the reviewers credited partly to the X-Port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe reviewers did not learn the price until the end. \"We'd have put them at least double the actual price,\" they wrote, and called the R200 a bargain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e named the R200 a 2021 Stand-Mount Loudspeaker of the Year. Reviewer Neil Gader wrote: \"the R200 cuts right to the heart of the music by outputting tunes and tones with equal measures of accuracy, dynamism, and immediacy.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is This Bookshelf Speaker Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want standmount bass without a subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 6.5-inch woofer and 39 Hz overall response are as deep as the Reserve bookshelves go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a forward, lively presentation\u003c\/strong\u003e — The Absolute Sound described a monitor-style sound with warmth in the midrange\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are building a Reserve home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — the R200 matches the R400 center and R900 height modules for a consistent voice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a medium or large room\u003c\/strong\u003e — Sound+Image found the R200 rewards being turned up and driven with quality power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need a smaller cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r100-bookshelf-speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eReserve R100\u003c\/a\u003e is 1.3 inches shorter and 7 pounds lighter, with the same tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do They Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpeaker cable runs from your amplifier or receiver to the dual binding posts on each speaker, red to red and black to black. These are passive speakers, so nothing plugs into the wall. Polk recommends 30 to 200 watts per channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace them on stands with the tweeter near ear height. Sound+Image found the imaging best from a seat dead center between the speakers, and heard uniform response across a wide sweet spot. Leave room behind the cabinet for the rear port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat completes the system. These are the categories most R200 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r400-center-channel-speaker-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R400 center channel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest Reserve center, with the same drivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/polk-audio-reserve-r900-height-module\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePolk Reserve R900 height module\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — sits on top of a Reserve speaker for Dolby Atmos height channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/integrated-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIntegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — choose one rated for 4-ohm speakers with 50 watts or more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/subwoofers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSubwoofers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — for film, or for the last half octave below 51 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAre the R200 sold as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The price is for two speakers with magnetic grilles. Audio Advisor stocks black, white and brown. Check the title of this listing for the finish you are ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much power do they need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePolk recommends 30 to 200 watts per channel. Because the impedance dips to 3.8 ohms, choose an amplifier or receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNot for most music. Polk quotes 39 Hz overall and 51 Hz at minus 3 dB, and Sound+Image heard solid bass. For film or deep electronic bass, add a subwoofer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the X-Port?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rear port with closed-pipe absorbers tuned to the cabinet's internal resonance. Polk says it keeps the bass output of a port while cancelling the resonances a plain port adds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow is the R200 different from the R100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe R200 has a 6.5-inch woofer instead of 5.25, reaches 39 Hz instead of 44, handles 200 watts instead of 150, and weighs 19.1 pounds each instead of 12.2.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they work with a receiver?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Any receiver rated for 4-ohm speakers with 30 watts or more per channel will drive them. The R200 also makes a strong front pair in a Reserve home theater.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAndrew Robinson reviews the Reserve R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/lTJxF2ktLLk\" title=\"Cheap Bookshelf Speakers! Polk Audio Speakers POLK RESERVE R200 Review - Andrew Robinson\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eErin's Audio Corner measures and discusses the Reserve R200:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BzDClEAQsBU\" title=\"What You Need to Know Before Buying The Polk R200! - Erin's Audio Corner\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, amplifier matching, or when to add a subwoofer? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Polk Audio","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982176706733,"sku":"NEW-POR200-WHT","price":799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/POR200_WHT_01-Large__73945.1731270084.1280.1280_f9fd46c7-c272-423c-9605-48c4c76d5589.jpg?v=1778135246"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/bookshelf-speakers.oembed?page=8","provider":"Audio Advisor","version":"1.0","type":"link"}